Psion OMNII User Manual

PDF

Dokumen

OMNII™

HAND-HELD COMPUTER

User Manual

(Windows

Embedded CE 6.0)

November 17, 2011

Part No. 8000211.A

ISO 9001 Certified

Quality Management System

2100 Meadowvale Boulevard, Mississauga, Ontario, Canada L5N 7J9 http://www.psion.com

This document and the information it contains is the property of Psion Inc. This document is not to be used, reproduced or copied, in whole or in part, except for the sole purpose of assisting in proper use of

Psion manufactured goods and services by their rightful owners and users. Any other use of this document is prohibited.

Disclaimer

Every effort has been made to make this material complete, accurate, and up-to-date. In addition, changes are periodically incorporated into new editions of the publication.

Psion Inc. reserves the right to make improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this document without notice, and shall not be responsible for any damages including, but not limited to, consequential damages, caused by reliance on the material presented.

Psion, the Psion logo, and the names of other products and services provided by Psion are trademarks of

Psion Inc.

Windows

® and the Windows Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

The Bluetooth

® word mark and logos are owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Psion

Inc. is under license.

All trademarks used herein are the property of their respective owners.

Return-To-Factory Warranty

Psion Inc. provides a return to factory warranty on this product for a period of twelve (12) months in accordance with the Statement of Limited Warranty and Limitation of Liability provided at: www.psion.com/warranty

The warranty on Psion manufactured equipment does not extend to any product that has been tampered with, altered, or repaired by any person other than an employee of an authorized Psion service organization. See Psion terms and conditions of sale for full details.

Important: Psion warranties take effect on the date of shipment.

Service and Information

Psion provides a complete range of product support services and information to its customers worldwide.

Services include technical support and product repairs. To locate your local support services, please go to: www.psion.com/service-and-support.htm

To access further information on current and discontinued products, please go to our Teknet site and log in or tap on “Not Registered?”, depending on whether you have previously registered for Teknet: http://community.psion.com/support

A section of archived product information is also available online: http://www.psion.com/products

TABLE OF

Table of Contents

Chapter 1: Introduction

1.1

About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

1.2

Text Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

1.3

Overview of Omnii Hand-Held Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

1.4

Regulatory Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Chapter 2: Basic Operation

2.1

Omnii Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

2.2

Omnii Modules Available. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

2.3

Documents Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

2.4

Preparing Omnii for Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

2.4.1

The Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

2.5

Switching Omnii On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

2.6

Resetting Omnii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

2.6.1

Performing a Warm Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

2.6.2

Performing a Cold Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

2.6.3

Performing a Clean Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

2.6.4

Boot to BooSt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

2.6.5

Performing a Hard Reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

2.7

Attaching Carrying Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

2.8

Calibrating the Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

2.9

Imager and Scanner Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

2.10

Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

2.11

Data Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

2.12

Voice Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii

3.1

Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

3.2

Battery Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

3.2.1

Battery Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

3.2.2

Battery Swap Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

3.2.3

Charging the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

3.3

The Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

3.3.1

Regular Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

3.3.2

Modifier Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

3.3.2.1

Activating Modifier Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

3.3.2.2

Locking Modifier Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

3.3.3

Function Keys and Macro Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

3.3.3.1

Function Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

3.3.3.2

Macro Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

3.3.4

Numeric Keyboards — Accessing Alpha Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

3.3.5

The Keypad Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

3.4

The Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

3.4.1

Adjusting the Display Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

3.4.2

Calibrating the Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual i

Table of Contents

3.5

Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

3.5.1

LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

3.5.1.1

Battery Charge Status LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

3.5.1.2

Operating System Status LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

3.5.1.3

Radio Status LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

3.5.1.4

Scanner Status LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

3.5.2

Onscreen Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

3.5.3

Audio Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

3.5.4

Vibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

3.6

Inserting the microSD Card and SIM Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

3.6.1

Inserting the Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

3.7

Scanners and Imagers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

3.7.1

Basic Scanner Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

3.7.2

Scanning Techniques. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

3.7.3

Scanner Status LED, Sounds, and Vibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

3.7.4

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

3.7.5

Operating One Dimensional (1D) Internal Laser Scanners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

3.7.6

Operating Internal Two Dimensional (2D) Imagers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

3.8

Windows Embedded CE 6.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

3.8.1

Navigating in Windows Embedded CE and Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

3.8.1.1

Navigating Using a Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

3.8.1.2

Navigating Using the Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

3.8.2

The Windows Classic Shell Startup Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

3.8.2.1

The Taskbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

3.8.2.2

The Start Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

3.9

The PsionVU Desktop Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

3.9.1

Restoring the Windows Classic Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

3.10

General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

3.10.1

Caring for the Touchscreen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

3.10.2

Cleaning Omnii. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Chapter 4: Configuration

4.1

Overview of Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

4.1.1

Psion Software Advantage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

4.1.2

Microsoft Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

4.2

The Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

4.2.1

Control Panel Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

4.3

App Launch Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

4.4

Bluetooth

Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

4.4.1

Paired . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

4.4.2

Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

4.4.2.1

Discovering and Removing Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

4.4.2.2

Filtering By Class of Device (COD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

4.4.2.3

Device Pop-up Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

4.4.2.4

Pairing a Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

4.4.3

Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

4.4.4

Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

4.4.5

About . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

4.4.6

The Bluetooth GPRS WAN Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

4.5

Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 ii Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Table of Contents

4.6

Data Transfer between Omnii and a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

4.6.1

Uploading Data in a Docking Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

4.6.2

Using Microsoft ActiveSync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

4.6.3

Using Windows Mobile Device Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

4.7

Display Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

4.7.1

Background. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

4.7.2

Appearance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

4.7.3

Backlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

4.8

Dr. Debug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

4.8.1

Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

4.8.2

Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

4.8.3

Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

4.9

Error Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

4.10

GPS (Global Positioning System) Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

4.10.1

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

4.10.2

Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

4.10.3

Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

4.10.4

AGPS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

4.10.5

Info. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

4.11

Imager & Camera Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

4.12

Input Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

4.12.1

Keyboard Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

4.12.1.1

Key Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

4.12.1.2

Keyboard Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

4.12.1.3

Keyboard One Shot Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

4.12.1.4

Keyboard Macro Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

4.12.1.5

Unicode Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

4.12.1.6

Scancode Remapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

4.12.1.7

Lock Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

4.13

Manage Triggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

4.13.1

Trigger Mappings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

4.13.2

Add and Edit Trigger Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

4.14

Microphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

4.15

Open TekTerm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

4.16

PartnerUp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

4.17

Pocket PC Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

4.18

Power Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

4.18.1

Battery Capacity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

4.18.2

Power Saving Suspend. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

4.18.3

Suspend Threshold and Estimated Battery Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

4.18.4

Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

4.18.5

Built-in Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

4.18.6

Battery Health . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

4.19

PsionVU Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

4.19.1

Administrator Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

4.19.2

Shell Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

4.19.3

Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

4.19.4

Control Panel Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

4.19.5

Import/Export to File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

4.20 Remote Desktop Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual iii

Table of Contents

4.21

Scanners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

4.21.1

Barcodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

4.21.1.1

Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

4.21.1.2

Restoring Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

4.21.2

Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

4.21.2.1

Double Click Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

4.21.2.2

Display Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

4.21.2.3

Data Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

4.21.3

Translations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

4.21.3.1

Case Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

4.21.4

Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

4.21.4.1

Port Replicator Port A (COM5) and Port B (COM6). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

4.22 Screen Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

4.23 Storage Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

4.23.1

Formatting a Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

4.23.2 Creating Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

4.23.3 Partition Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

4.24 Stylus Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

4.24.1

Double-Tap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

4.24.2 Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

4.24.3 Touch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

4.25 System Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

4.26 Total Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

4.26.1

Creating a Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

4.26.2 Creating a Clone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

4.26.3 Managing Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

4.26.3.1

Viewing a Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

4.26.3.2 Profile Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

4.26.4 Deleting a Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

4.27 TweakIt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

4.27.1

Advanced. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

4.27.1.1

Advanced CE Services Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

4.27.1.2

Advanced Interface and Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

4.27.1.3

Advanced Services Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

4.27.2

User. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

4.27.2.1

User Display Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

4.27.3

TweakIt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

4.28 Voice – Using the WWAN Phone Dialer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

4.28.1

Dialing a Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

4.28.2 Receiving an Incoming Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

4.28.3 Voice Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

4.28.3.1

Call Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

4.28.3.2 Call Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

4.28.3.3 Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

4.28.4 File Menu – Phonebook Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

4.29 Volume & Sounds Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

4.29.1

Volume Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

4.29.2 Sound Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

4.30 Wi-Fi Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

4.30.1

Wi-Fi Config: Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 iv Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Table of Contents

4.30.2 Wi-Fi Config: Configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

4.30.2.1

Authentication Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

4.30.2.2 Encryption. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

4.30.2.3 EAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

4.30.2.4 Verify Server Certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

4.30.2.5 Enable OPMK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

4.30.2.6 Connecting the Wireless Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

4.30.3 Configuring TCP/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

4.30.3.1

IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

4.30.3.2 Name Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

4.30.4 Wi-Fi Config: Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

4.30.5 Monitoring the Network Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Chapter 5: Accessories

5.1

Pistol Grips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

5.1.1

Removing the Trigger Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

5.1.2

Attaching the Pistol Grip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

5.2

Carrying and Protective Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

5.2.1

The Hand Strap - Model ST6025 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

5.2.2

The Shoulder Strap - Model ST6030 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

5.2.3

Protective Carrying Case - Model ST6090. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

5.2.4

Hard Shell Holster - Model ST6055. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

5.3

Power Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

5.3.1

Snap Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

5.3.2

AC Wall Adaptor - Models ST1050 and ST1050-AR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

5.3.3

Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor - Model ST3113 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

5.4

Chargers and Docking Stations: General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

5.4.1

Important Charger Safety Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

5.4.2

Charging the Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

5.4.3

Installation — Chargers and Docking Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

5.4.4

Operator Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

5.4.5

Power Consumption Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

5.5

Desktop Docking Stations - Models ST4002 and ST4003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

5.5.1

Charging a Battery Installed in Omnii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

5.5.2

Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

5.5.3

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

5.5.3.1

Charging the Omnii Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

5.5.3.2

Charging the Spare Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

5.5.4

Cleaning the Desktop Docking Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

5.5.5

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

5.5.5.1

Docking station does not seem to power on.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

5.5.5.2

Omnii charge indicator LED stays off.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

5.5.5.3

Omnii charge indicator LED is red. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

5.5.5.4

Spare battery LED is red with a battery installed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

5.5.5.5

Spare battery LED does not turn on when a battery is installed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

5.6

Quad Docking Station – Model No. ST4004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

5.6.1

Operator Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

5.6.2

Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

5.6.3

Quad Docking Station Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

5.6.3.1

Charging the Omnii Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual v

Table of Contents

5.6.3.2

Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

5.6.3.3

Connecting to the Ethernet Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

5.6.4

Cleaning the ST4004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

5.6.5

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

5.6.5.1

Omnii Charge Indicator LED Stays Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

5.6.5.2

Power LED Does Not Light Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

5.6.5.3

Omnii Charge LED Flashes Yellow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

5.6.5.4

Omnii Charge Indicator LED is Red . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

5.6.5.5

Powered Adaptor LED Stays Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

5.7

Vehicle Cradles - Models ST1000 and ST1002 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

5.7.1

Vehicle Cradle Mounting Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

5.7.2

Insertion and Removal of Omnii. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

5.7.3

Maintaining the Vehicle Cradle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

5.7.4

ST1002 Powered Cradle Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

5.7.4.1

Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

5.7.4.2

Installation in High Voltage Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

5.7.4.3

Extreme Wet Environments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

5.7.4.4

Wiring Vehicle Power and Communications to the Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

5.8

Battery Charger (6-Slot) - Model ST3006 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

5.8.1

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

5.8.2

Operator Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

5.8.3

Charge Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

5.8.4

Charging Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

5.8.5

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

5.8.5.1

Improper Battery Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

5.8.5.2

Power Self-test LEDs Don’t Light Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

5.8.5.3

Indicator Does Not Light When Battery Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Appendices

Appendix A: Port Pinouts

A.1

Omnii Docking Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3

A.2

Snap Modules Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4

A.3

Cable Connectors for Vehicle Cradle Model ST1002 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5

A.4

Omnii Battery Contacts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6

Appendix B: Omnii Specifications

B.1

The Omnii Hand-Held Computer (Model 7545) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3

B.1.1

Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3

B.1.2

Regulatory Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4

B.2

Lithium-ion Smart Battery 5000 mAh (ST3001). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5

B.3

Wireless Radios. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6

B.3.1

GSM/GPRS/EDGE Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6

B.3.2

802.11a/b/g/n Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7

B.3.3

Bluetooth Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8

Appendix C: Imager & Camera Settings

C.1

Required Applets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3

C.2

Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3 vi Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Table of Contents

C.2.1

Predefined Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3

C.2.2

Barcode Predefined Presets (Barcoding Menu). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3

C.2.2.1

Barcode Decoding Symbology Predefined Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4

C.2.2.2

Barcode Decoding Camera Predefined Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4

C.2.3

Image Capture Predefined Presets (Imaging Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4

C.3

Using the Imagers Applet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5

C.3.1

Configuring the Image Capture Presets (Imaging Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5

C.3.1.1

Selecting a Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5

C.3.1.2

Setting the Active Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5

C.3.1.3

Viewing a Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6

C.3.1.4

Creating a Custom Preset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6

C.3.1.5

Modifying a Custom Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6

C.3.1.6

Removing a Custom Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7

C.3.2

Configuring the Barcode Decoding Camera Presets (Barcoding Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7

C.3.2.1

Selecting a Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8

C.3.2.2

Setting the Active Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8

C.3.2.3

Viewing a Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8

C.3.2.4

Creating a Custom Preset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9

C.3.2.5

Modifying a Custom Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9

C.3.2.6

Removing a Custom Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10

C.3.3

Configuring the Barcode Decoding Symbologies (Barcoding Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10

C.3.3.1

Setting the Active Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11

C.3.3.2

Viewing a Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11

C.3.3.3

Creating a Custom Preset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11

C.3.3.4

Modifying a Custom Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-12

C.3.3.5

Removing a Custom Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13

C.3.4

Barcoding Menu – Configuring Symbologies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13

C.3.4.1

Symbology Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13

C.3.5

Filter Menu – Manipulating Barcode Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13

C.3.5.1

Modifying a Barcode Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13

C.3.6

Translation Menu – Configuring Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-14

C.3.7

Advanced Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-15

C.3.7.1

File Locations for Captured Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-15

C.3.7.2

Configuring Triggers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-15

C.4

Barcode Symbologies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16

C.4.1

Imager Barcode Symbologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-17

C.4.2

Color Camera Barcode Symbologies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-18

Appendix D: Scanner Settings

D.1

Barcode Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3

D.1.1

Scanner Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3

D.1.2

Restoring Default Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3

D.2

Decoded (Internal) Scanners. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4

D.2.1

Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5

D.2.2

Decoded (Internal) Advanced Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5

D.2.3

Decoded (Internal) Data Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6

D.3

Decoded (HHP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7

D.4

Decoded (Intermec ISCP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7

D.4.1

Decoded (ISCP) Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7

D.4.2

Decoded (ISCP) Advanced Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual vii

Table of Contents

D.5

Non-Decoded Scanners. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9

D.5.1

Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10

Appendix E: Internal Imager & Scanner Specifications

E.1

SE955 Scanner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3

E.1.1

SE955 Decode Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3

E.2

SE1223LR - Long Range (Decoded) Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-4

E.2.1

SE 1223LR Decode Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-4

E.3

SE1224HP - High Performance Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5

E.3.1

SE1224HP Decode Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5

E.4

SE1524ER – Extended Range Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6

E.4.1

SE1524ER Decode Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6

E.5

EV15 Imager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-7

E.5.1

EV15 Imager Decode Zone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-7

E.6

EA11 Decoded 2D Imager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-8

E.6.1

EA11 Typical Reading Distances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-8

E.7

EA20X Imager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-9

E.7.1

EA20X Typical Reading Distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-9

E.8

HHP 5080 Imager/Decoder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-10

E.8.1

HHP 5080 Working Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-10

Appendix F: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN) Settings

F.1

Wireless WAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-3

F.1.1

Taskbar Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-3

F.1.2

Establishing a Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-3

F.1.3

F.1.2.1

F.1.2.2

Disconnecting From a Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-4

Shutting Down the Wireless WAN User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-4

Advanced Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-5

F.1.3.1

F.1.3.2

Entering a PIN Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-5

Error States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-5

F.1.4

Tools Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-6

F.1.4.1

F.1.4.2

F.1.4.3

F.1.4.4

F.1.4.5

Data Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-6

Security Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-9

Network Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-9

Driver Mode Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-10

Modem Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-11

F.1.5

F.1.4.6

User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-11

SMS Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-12

F.1.5.1

New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-12

F.1.5.2

F.1.5.3

F.1.5.4

Inbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-12

Outbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-13

SMS Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-13

F.1.6

Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-13

F.2

Power Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-13

Appendix G: Wireless Zero Config Settings

G.1

Wireless Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-3

G.1.1

Wireless Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-3

G.1.2

Wireless Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-4

G.2

Assigning An IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-6 viii Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Table of Contents

G.2.1

Name Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-6

G.3

Advanced Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-7

G.3.1

Rearranging Preferred Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-7

G.3.2

Deleting A Preferred Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-7

G.3.3

Changing Network Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-7

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I

ix Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

INTRODUCTION

1.1

INTRODUCTION

About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

1.2

Text Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

1.3

Overview of Omnii Hand-Held Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

1.4

Regulatory Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 1

1.1

Chapter 1: Introduction

About This Manual

This User Manual describes how to configure, operate, and maintain the Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer.

Chapter 1: Introduction provides a basic overview of Omnii.

Chapter 2: Basic Operation describes the steps required to get Omnii ready for operation.

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii describes Omnii features, including how to charge and maintain the battery, the keyboard features, the display, using the internal scanner, etc. Also describes the Microsoft

Windows

Embedded CE 6.0 desktop and how to use it, and how to change the appearance and actions of the desktop from Windows Classic Shell to the PsionVU Shell.

Chapter 4: Configuration describes the Psion Software Advantage and Microsoft programs, and how to use them to configure Omnii, along with scanners/imagers, Bluetooth , and so on. This chapter also introduces you to the PsionVU program, which enables you to customize your computer settings, remove or add shortcuts to the desktop and Control Panel, and lock down access to various different components on the computer and the system tray icons for security. With PsionVU and PsionVU Shell you can greatly enhance your User Experience.

Chapter 5: Accessories describes the peripherals and accessories available for your Omnii computer.

Appendix A: Port Pinouts describes the Omnii and accessories pinouts.

Appendix B: Omnii Specifications lists the specifications for your Omnii computer, radios, and battery.

Appendix C: Imager & Camera Settings describes in detail your imager’s settings.

Appendix D: Scanner Settings details your barcode options.

Appendix E: Internal Imager & Scanner Specifications lists the specifications for the Omnii scanners and imagers.

Appendix F: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN) Settings describes WWAN configuration information (MC75i GSM/GPRS/EDGE radio).

Appendix G: Wireless Zero Config Settings outlines the steps used to configure your radio using Windows Zero Config .

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 3

Chapter 1: Introduction

Text Conventions

1.2 Text Conventions

Note: Notes highlight additional helpful information.

1.3

Important: These statements provide particularly important instructions or additional information that is critical to the operation of the equipment.

Warning: These statements provide critical information that may prevent physical injury, equipment damage or data loss.

Overview of Omnii Hand-Held Computer

Omnii Hand-Held Computer is a modular, industrial hand-held computer. A variety of options are available to suit applications in courier/delivery, field service, manufacturing facilities, material handling applications in warehouses, ports and yards, with a focus on real time wireless data transactions. Barcode input methodologies are supported by a variety of available scanners. Optimization for specific operational environments is also supported with a wide range of peripheral options and carrying accessories.

Note: Omnii Hand-Held Computer is a body worn device, and to maintain compliance with the FCC

RF exposure guidelines, use a Psion approved carrying case. Use of non-approved accessories may violate FCC RF exposure guidelines.

Note: For product specifications, refer to Appendix B: “Omnii Specifications”.

Model Variants

• Omnii RT15 Hand-Held Computer (rugged) - Model 7545XC

• Omnii XT15 Hand-Held Computer (extremely rugged) - Model 7545XA

Processor and Memory

• Texas Instruments

AM3715 Sitara ARM Processor 800 MHz

• Flash ROM: 1 GB

• RAM: 256 MB

• 3 axis accelerometer

Operating System

• Microsoft

Windows

Embedded CE 6.0

Bundled Applications

• Internet Explorer

• Windows Mobile Device Center

• Wordpad

, ActiveSync

Supported Applications

• Open TekTerm

• Stay-Linked Terminal Emulation

• Naurtech Browser

• Naurtech Terminal Emulation

• NetMotion Mobility XE VPN

4 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 1: Introduction

Overview of Omnii Hand-Held Computer

Device Management and Utilities

• PsionVU

• Mobile Control Centre (MCC)

• Total Recall, TweakIt, Dr. Debug

User Interface

• Colour/Touch Display 9.4 cm (3.7 in) diagonal

- VGA (640 x 480) Transflective

- High visibility option: superior sunlight visibility with 165 cd/m

brightness

- Extreme Duty option: withstands 1.25 Joule impact, superior low temperature operation (to -20° C/-

4° F), with 160 cd/m

brightness. Better abrasion resistance.

• Touchscreen

- Passive stylus or finger operation; pan and flick gestures supported

- Signature capture

• Keyboards

- Large selection of backlit keypads in both alpha and numeric formats. For a list of currently available keyboard configurations, consult your Psion representative, or go to: http://www.psion.com/us/products/handheld.htm

• Voice, Audio & Feedback

- High volume beeper: 95 dBA

- Integrated microphone and speaker

- Optional Push-to-Talk Speaker

• Walkie-talkie style Push-to-Talk – VoIP over WiFi or WWAN

• Vibration feedback

Wireless Connectivity

• Integrated Bluetooth® V2.0 + EDR

• Integrated 802.11a/b/g/n WiFi

• Bluetooth ® coexistence

• CCX v4

• Optional SIRF III GPS Receiver

• Optional GPS/GPRS/EDGE WWAN radio

Note: 802.11b/g and Bluetooth are available simultaneously.

The following figures illustrate the main features of Omnii—for detailed views, please see “Omnii Features” on page 11.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 5

Chapter 1: Introduction

Overview of Omnii Hand-Held Computer

Figure 1.1

Omnii XT15 and RT15 Models

Omnii XT15

59-Key Alpha ABC Keyboard

Omnii RT15

55-Key Alpha ABC Keyboard

Figure 1.2

Bottom View (Docking Connector)

6 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Figure 1.3

Top View (Scanner Window)

Laser Aperture

Chapter 1: Introduction

Regulatory Labels

1.4 Regulatory Labels

Figure 1.4

Laser Warning Label

This label is affixed below the scanner window.

Warning: Using controls or adjustments or performing procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

Figure 1.5

LED Radiation Notice Label

Thi l b l i ffi d b l th i d

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 7

BASIC OPERATION

2.1

Omnii Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

2.2 Omnii Modules Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

2.3 Documents Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

2.4 Preparing Omnii for Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

2.4.1

The Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

2.5 Switching Omnii On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

2.6 Resetting Omnii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

2.6.1

Performing a Warm Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

2.6.2 Performing a Cold Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

2.6.3 Performing a Clean Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

2.6.4 Boot to BooSt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

2.6.5 Performing a Hard Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

2.7 Attaching Carrying Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

2.8 Calibrating the Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

2.9 Imager and Scanner Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

2.10 Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

2.11 Data Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

2.12 Voice Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 9

2.1

Chapter 2: Basic Operation

Omnii Features

Figure 2.1

Front View of Omnii XT15 Model with Alphanumeric Keyboard

Speaker

LEDs

Beeper

Display

Scan Key

Microphone

Symbol Modifier Key FN Modifier Key

ENTER/Power Key

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 11

Chapter 2: Basic Operation

Omnii Features

Figure 2.2 Side Views of Omnii XT15

Right Side Left Side

Vertical scroll button

Volume rocker button

Scan button

ENTER button

Battery release button

Side rail

Slot for Snap Module arm

Figure 2.3 Bottom View

1 - Docking Connector

2 - Alignment Pin Holes

3 - M2.5 Locking Screws

(for firmly attaching devices)

4 - Hand Strap Slot

12 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Figure 2.4 Top View

Chapter 2: Basic Operation

Omnii Modules Available

Laser

Aperture

End-Cap

Figure 2.5 Back View

Rear PTT Speaker

(optional)

Scanner Pod

Expansion Back

Camera Aperture

Scanner Window

Pistol Grip

Attachment Screws (4)

Battery Pack

2.2

2.3 Omnii Modules Available

To see a current list of Omnii accessories and modules, please go to the Psion website at: http://www.psion.com/us/products/handheld.htm

Documents Available

To see a current list of documents and download what you need, please go to the Knowledge Base on the

Psion Ingenuity Working community website: http://community.psion.com/knowledge/w/knowledgebase/product-manuals.aspx

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 13

Chapter 2: Basic Operation

Preparing Omnii for Operation

2.4

2.4.1

Preparing Omnii for Operation

The Battery

Omnii is powered by a Lithium-ion Smart Battery pack, 5000 mAh—Model ST3001.

Important: Before charging the battery, it is critical that you review the battery safety guidelines in the Omnii Hand-Held Computer Regulatory & Warranty Guide

(PN 8000191).

Battery packs shipped from the factory are charged to approximately 40% and must be fully charged prior to use. Batteries can be charged using a variety of chargers and docking stations. For detailed information, see “Battery Details” on page 21.

Replacing the Battery Pack

Important: Always switch the unit off before changing the battery (see “Switching Omnii On and Off” on page 15). However, assuming the default power saving parameters and battery reserve level have not been altered, battery swap time is a minimum of 4 minutes—you will not lose data if the battery is replaced within this time frame.

Figure 2.6 Omnii Battery

1 2

Battery Top

1 - Release button

2 - Battery compartment

3 - Guide tabs

4 - Release button tabs

Contacts

Battery bottom

Note: If you are using a docking station or an external power supply, you can insert an uncharged battery and use the device while the battery charges.

Assuming the default power saving parameters and battery reserve level have not been altered, a battery can be removed for up to 4 minutes without losing data. After 4 minutes the terminal may reboot.

Removing the Battery Pack

• If your unit is equipped with a hand or shoulder strap, unhook it from the base of the battery.

• Press the two buttons at the sides of the compartment simultaneously, and slide the battery out.

Installing the Battery Pack

• Slide the charged battery with the contoured plastic facing you into the unit with the contacts matching position and the guide tabs moving into the corresponding slots at the base of the compartment.

Click both sides of the battery into place.

• If your computer is equipped with a hand or shoulder strap, re-attach the clip to the slot at the base of the battery.

• Switch the unit on (see “Switching Omnii On and Off” on page 15).

14 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

2.5

Chapter 2: Basic Operation

Switching Omnii On and Off

Follow the instructions below for your Omnii. If your keyboard has a power button (55- and 66-key keyboards only), press that instead of the key combinations described.

Switching Omnii On

• Press and hold down the [ENTER/Power] key for at least one second.

When the unit is turned off, normally it automatically enters a power-saving, “suspend” state. When Omnii is switched on from the suspend state, operation resumes within a few seconds in the screen in which you were working prior to turning the computer off.

Important: If your Omnii fails to power up, consider the following troubleshooting options:

The battery may be overheated (>60C°), a non-Psion battery may be installed, or the battery may have fallen below the configured Suspend Threshold. See “Suspend Threshold and Estimated Battery Backup” on page 87 for details.

To switch on the hand-held, you will need to replace the overheated battery.

However, if you supply AC power to Omnii with a battery that falls below the configured Suspend Threshold, the unit will switch on.

Switching Omnii Off

• To switch off Omnii, press the [FN] key and then press and release the [ENTER/Power] button. Omnii will automatically enter the Suspend state.

Important: Turning off the hand-held does not result in a complete shutdown; rather, the unit enters a power-saving, “suspend” state. When Omnii is turned on from suspend state, operation resumes within a few seconds.

2.6

Important: If the word ‘FN’ is displayed underlined in the taskbar area at the bottom of the screen, this key is locked “on” and Omnii will not switch off. Press the [FN] key twice followed by [ENTER/Power] to switch Omnii off.

However, if you’ve set the mode to “Lock” (see “Keyboard One Shot Modes” on page 76), Omnii can be turned off even when the [FN] key is locked ‘on’.

Resetting Omnii

To perform a warm or cold reset, you can access the menu by going to Start>Shutdown . Alternatively you can use the keyboard shortcuts described below.

Note: If your Desktop is switched to the PsionVU Shell (refer to “The PsionVU Desktop Shell” on page 42), resetting the unit is done solely by use of the keyboard shortcuts.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 15

Chapter 2: Basic Operation

Performing a Warm Reset

2.6.1

2.6.2

2.6.3

2.6.4

2.6.5

Performing a Warm Reset

During a warm reset , running programs are halted. The contents of the file system, RAM Disk, Flash Disk, and the registry are preserved.

• Press and hold down the [FN] key and the [ENTER/Power] key simultaneously for a minimum of four seconds.

Note: You need to reset your Omnii after configuring the radio by switching between Windows

Zero Config and WiFi Config.

Performing a Cold Reset

A cold reset reinitializes all hardware. All RAM including the RAM Disk is erased. Non-volatile storage such as the Flash Disk is preserved, as is the file system.

To execute a cold reset:

• Press and hold down the [SYM] key, the [FN] key, and the [ENTER/Power] key, simultaneously for a minimum of four seconds.

Note: As part of the normal Windows Embedded CE cold boot process, the screen may go blank for a few seconds after the splash screen loading bar reaches the end. The desktop is displayed after a few moments.

Performing a Clean Start

A clean start returns Omnii to factory settings, flushes the registry keys, and deletes volatile storage and the file system. The Flash Disk is preserved.

• Press and hold down the [FN] key, the [ENTER/Power] button and the [SCAN] key simultaneously for a minimum of six seconds.

Omnii displays the Boot to BooSt menu.

• On an alpha keyboard , type .clean

• On a numeric keyboard , type .25326

Boot to BooSt

If you choose Boot to BooSt, the BooSt menu is loaded.

• Press and hold down the [FN] key, the [ENTER/Power] button and the [SCAN] key for a minimum of four seconds.

• Press [1] to launch the OS .

Performing a Hard Reset

Important: This procedure is recommended as a last resort, when all other methods fail.

To execute a hard reset:

• Remove the battery.

• Using a coin, or other conductive item, connect pins 5 and 6 of the Omnii battery contacts for at least

6 seconds.

Pin 6 Pin 5

16 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

2.7

2.8

Chapter 2: Basic Operation

Attaching Carrying Accessories

• Replace the battery and power Omnii on. The terminal will boot as if from a cold reset.

Attaching Carrying Accessories

Psion recommends that a carrying accessory—a hand strap or shoulder strap—be installed on Omnii before use. For detailed information, please see “Carrying and Protective Accessories” on page 134.

Calibrating the Touchscreen

Note: The touchscreen function can be turned off (see “Touch” on page 108).

2.9

2.10

2.11

2.12

The Omnii touchscreen feature is factory-calibrated and ready-to-go; however, over time the touchscreen's operating parameters may change, and it may need to be recalibrated for correct operation. Refer to “Calibrating the Touchscreen” on page 27 for details.

Imager and Scanner Options

If your Omnii is equipped with an internal imager or scanner, please review the relevant sections:

Appendix C: “Imager & Camera Settings” and Appendix D: “Scanner Settings” for details.

Appendix E: “Internal Imager & Scanner Specifications” lists their current model numbers, descriptions, and specifications.

Connectivity

For information on connecting Omnii to a PC, please refer to “Data Transfer between Omnii and a PC” on page 66

Omnii contains an integrated 802.11a/b/g/n radio module. The Wi-Fi Config application is used to configure the radio for one or more wireless network profiles. To configure the radio, follow the steps outlined under the heading “Wi-Fi Config” on page 121.

To configure your Bluetooth settings, please go to “Bluetooth® Setup” on page 56.

If you have a GPS (Global Positioning System) module, you can choose from a set of GPS profiles built into the modem and set up AGPS (Assisted Global Positioning System). See “GPS (Global Positioning System)

Settings” on page 70.

To see the radio specifications, please go to “Wireless Radios” on page B-6.

Data Transfer

Data transfer options vary slightly depending on the type of operating system installed in your PC. Various options exist depending on whether you are using Windows XP or earlier, Windows Vista

, Windows 7 or later. For connection details, please refer to “Data Transfer between Omnii and a PC” on page 66.

Voice Communication

If the MC75i GSM/GPRS/EDGE WWAN radio modem is installed and enabled, the Phone icon and the GSM signal strength icon will appear automatically on the taskbar. For details on using your Voice options, please refer to “Voice – Using the WWAN Phone Dialer” on page 115.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 17

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR

OMNII

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR OMNII

3.1

Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

3.2 Battery Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

3.2.1

Battery Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

3.2.2 Battery Swap Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

3.2.3 Charging the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

3.3 The Keyboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

3.3.1

Regular Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

3.3.2.1

Activating Modifier Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

3.3.2.2 Locking Modifier Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

3.3.2 Modifier Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

3.3.3 Function Keys and Macro Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

3.3.3.1

Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

3.3.3.2 Macro Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

3.3.4 Numeric Keyboards — Accessing Alpha Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

3.3.5 The Keypad Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

3.4 The Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

3.4.1

Adjusting the Display Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

3.4.2 Calibrating the Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

3.5 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

3.5.1

LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

3.5.1.1

Battery Charge Status LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

3.5.1.2

Operating System Status LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

3.5.1.3

Radio Status LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

3.5.1.4

Scanner Status LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

3.5.2 Onscreen Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

3.5.3 Audio Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

3.6 Inserting the microSD Card and SIM Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

3.6.1

Inserting the Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

3.7

Scanners and Imagers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

3.7.1

Basic Scanner Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

3.7.2

Scanning Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

3.7.3

Scanner Status LED, Sounds, and Vibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

3.7.4

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

3.7.5

Operating One Dimensional (1D) Internal Laser Scanners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

3.7.6

Operating Internal Two Dimensional (2D) Imagers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

3.8 Windows Embedded CE 6.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

3.8.1

Navigating in Windows Embedded CE and Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

3.8.1.1

Navigating Using a Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

3.8.1.2

Navigating Using the Keyboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

3.8.2 The Windows Classic Shell Startup Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

3.8.2.1

The Taskbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

3.8.2.2 The Start Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

3.9 The PsionVU Desktop Shell. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

3.9.1

Restoring the Windows Classic Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

3.10 General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 19

3.10.1 Caring for the Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

3.10.2 Cleaning Omnii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

20 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii

Operating System

3.1

3.2

3.2.1

3.2.2

3.2.3

Operating System

• Microsoft

Windows

Embedded CE 6.0

Battery Details

Omnii Hand-Held Computers are powered by a lithium-ion battery pack, Model ST3001.

Please see the following sections for detailed battery information:

• Installation: “Preparing Omnii for Operation” on page 14.

• Calibration and power settings: “Power Properties” on page 86.

• Chargers and docking stations: Chapter 5: “Accessories”.

• Specifications: “Lithium-ion Smart Battery 5000 mAh (ST3001)” on page B-5.

• Contact pinout: “Omnii Battery Contacts” on page A-6.

Battery Safety

Important: Before attempting to install, use, or charge the battery pack, it is critical that you review and follow the important safety guidelines in the quick reference guide entitled the Omnii Hand-Held Computer Regulatory & Warranty Guide,

PN 8000191.

Battery Swap Time

Assuming the default power saving parameters and battery reserve level have not been altered, battery swap time is a minimum of 4 minutes—you will not lose data if the battery is replaced within this time frame.

To protect data, the safest place to store data is on a microSD memory card or externally to the device on a

USB memory stick or on a PC. You can also save data in the “Flash Disk” partition of the file system.

Refer to “Suspend Threshold and Estimated Battery Backup” on page 87 for details about reserving battery power for data backup purposes.

The Suspend Threshold adjustment in the Power Properties tab allows you to determine the battery capacity at which Omnii will be shut down. If left at the default value, Maximum Operating Time , the unit will run until the battery is completely empty; the RAM is only backed up for a short period of time. If you choose

Maximum Backup Time , Omnii shuts off with more energy left in the battery so RAM can be backed up for a longer period of time.

Important: If your Omnii fails to power up, consider the following troubleshooting options:

To switch on the hand-held, you will need to replace the overheated battery.

However, if you supply AC power to Omnii with a battery that falls below the configured Suspend Threshold, the unit will switch on.

Charging the Battery

Batteries shipped from the factory are charged to approximately 40% of capacity. Lithium-ion battery packs must be fully charged before use. These batteries can be charged with a variety of chargers and docking stations. For detailed information on these accessories, please see Chapter 5: “Accessories”.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 21

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii

The Keyboard

Normally it takes 3 to 4 hours to charge a battery. The Omnii intelligent charging system protects the battery from over-charging by terminating the charge process when the battery is at maximum capacity.

Table 3.1

Omnii Internal Battery Charging Times at 25°C (77°F)

% Charge Completed

100%

75%

4 hrs.

2 hrs.

During Sleep Mode

8 hrs.

6 hrs.

While Operating

3.3

Important: To avoid damaging the battery, chargers will not begin the charge process until the battery temperature is between 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F).

The Keyboard

Omnii offers a wide variety of Alpha and Numeric keyboard layouts.

See http://www.psion.com/us/products/handheld.htm

for a list of available configurations. Most of the keys on these keyboards operate much like a desktop computer. Where a key or key function is not consistent with the PC keyboard, those differences are described in the following sections.

Omnii is equipped with either an [Enter/Power] key or Power button (55- and 66-key keyboards only) that allows you to switch the unit on and to shut down the unit to Suspend mode. For details refer to “Switching

Omnii On and Off” on page 15.

There are a number of modifier keys that provide access to additional keys and system functions, as described in “Modifier Keys” on page 24.

The [BLUE/FN] modifier key provides access to additional keys and system functions. These functions are colour coded in blue print above the keyboard keys.

Figure 3.1

Keyboard Layouts

[SYM] Modifier Key [SCAN] Key [FN] Modifier Key

[ENTER/Power] Key

[SHIFT] Modifier Key

36-Key Numeric 123 Keyboard

[Windows] Key

59-Key Alpha ABC Keyboard

22 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii

Regular Keys

The Power Button (55-Key and 66-Key Keyboards only)

The [Power] button in the upper right corner of the keyboard switches the unit on and off.

[Talk] key

Power] button

[End] key

55-Key Alpha ABC Keyboard with phone

3.3.1

Regular Keys

The [ENTER/Power] Key

The [ENTER/Power] key is used to execute the usual Enter keyboard functions as well as to power the unit on and off (for details refer to “Switching Omnii On and Off” on page 15).

Note: 55-key and 66-key keyboards are equipped with a [Power] button. For these keyboards, the

[ENTER] key does not switch the unit on or off.

The [SHIFT] Key

The [SHIFT] key is used to display uppercase alpha characters and to provide access to other symbols and functions on the numeric keyboards. Press the [SHIFT] key to turn the shift state 'on' (it will be represented by an up arrow in the taskbar), then press another key to access the shifted function of that key.

Press the [SHIFT] key twice to lock the shift state on (the up arrow in the taskbar will be underlined). Press

[SHIFT] again to turn the shift state off.

To access CAPS LOCK mode, press [FN] + [SHIFT] . In this state, if you press a numeric key, the number is displayed rather than the normal shifted function of that key. Press [FN] + [SHIFT] again to turn the CAPS

LOCK mode off.

The Arrow Keys

The [Arrow] keys are located near the top of the keyboard, and are represented on the keyboard as triangles pointing in different directions. The [Arrow] keys move the cursor around the screen in the direction of the arrow: up, down, left and right. The left arrow key should not be confused with the [BACKSPACE] key which is depicted as a left arrow. The cursor is the flashing box or underline character that indicates where the next character you type will appear.

The [BACKSPACE/DEL] Key

The [BACKSPACE] key (represented on the keyboard as an arrow pointing left) moves the cursor one character to the left, erasing the previous key stroke.

The [DEL] key ([FN] +[BACKSPACE]) erases the character at the current cursor position.

The [CTRL] and [ALT] Key

The [CTRL] and [ALT] keys modify the function of the next key pressed and are application dependent.

Pressing either key twice locks it 'on' (it appears underlined on the Taskbar). Pressing the key once again unlocks it.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 23

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii

Modifier Keys

3.3.2

The [TAB] Key

Typically, the [TAB] key moves the cursor to the next field to the right or downward.

The [ESC] Key

Generally, this key is used as a keyboard shortcut to close the current menu, dialog box, or activity.

The [SPACE] Key

The [SPACE] key is represented on the keyboard by a long, low horizontal line contained by a small vertical line on each side. Pressing this key inserts a blank space between characters. In a Windows dialog box, pressing the [SPACE] key enables or disables a checkbox.

The [SCAN] Key

Omnii is equipped with a single [SCAN] key on the keyboard and an extra [SCAN] button located on the left side of the unit. [SCAN] keys activate the scanner beam. For units that do not have internal scanners, these keys can be remapped to serve other functions.

Modifier Keys

The [SHIFT], [CTRL], [ALT], [FN] and [SYM] keys are modifier keys that change the function of the next key pressed.

The [SHIFT], [CTRL] and [ALT] keys operate much like a desktop keyboard except that they are not chorded

(two keys held down simultaneously). The modifier key must be pressed first followed by the key whose function you want modified.

[SHIFT] and [FN]

The [SHIFT] and [FN] modifier keys provide access to additional keys and system functions. The functions related to these modifier keys are colour-coded in white and blue print respectively above the keyboard keys, dependant on your keyboard format.

[SYM]

Note: When using the Mobile Devices SDK Developers' Guide (PN 8100016), note that the [SYM] key is interchangeable with the [ORANGE] key.

The Symbol [SYM] modifier key is represented on the keyboard by the characters ‘SYM’ and provides access to commonly used symbolic characters. Pressing the key brings up the Symbol soft input panel (SIP) onscreen keyboard, with symbols mapped to each key. If you wish to adjust the settings for the pop-up screen (e.g. time of delay before screen appears, etc.), modify the file softinputpanel.xml

, located in the

Windows folder.

Note: Modifier keys are remapped in the Control Panel, and the Symbol SIP will automatically show and use the new mappings after the next reboot.

The onscreen keyboard corresponds to the specific keyboard on your Omnii—either numeric or alphanumeric.

24 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Figure 3.2 Symbol Soft Input Panels

Internet Browser Keys

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii

Function Keys and Macro Keys

[SPACE] Key

36-KEY Numeric Keyboard 59-KEY Alpha Keyboard

3.3.2.1

Activating Modifier Keys

When a modifier key is pressed, it is shown in the softkey bar at the bottom of the screen, making it easier to determine whether a modifier key is active. For example, if the [CTRL] key is pressed, Ctrl is displayed at the bottom of the unit screen. Once the next key is pressed, the modifier key becomes inactive and disappears from the taskbar.

3.3.2.2

Locking Modifier Keys

When a modifier key is pressed twice, it is ‘locked’ on. A ‘locked’ modifier key is displayed in underlined letters in the taskbar. For example, pressing the [FN] key twice locks it on—it is displayed as an underlined blue ‘FN’ in the taskbar at the bottom of the computer screen. The same is true of the [SYM] key, which is shown as an underlined orange ‘SYM’ in the taskbar.

The locked modifier key will remain active until it is pressed a third time to unlock or turn it off. Once a modifier key is unlocked, the underline representation at the bottom of the screen is no longer displayed.

Note: The locking function of the modifier keys can be changed so that pressing a key once will lock the key ‘on’.

If you disable the ‘One Shot’ function of the key, pressing it once will lock the key ‘on’. Pressing the same key a second time will unlock or turn it ‘off’. Refer to “Keyboard One Shot

Modes” on page 76 for details.

3.3.3

Function Keys and Macro Keys

In addition to the standard keyboard functions (see “The Keyboard” on page 22), Omnii supports function keys and macro keys.

All function keys and macro keys can be custom defined for each application. The Open TekTerm application utilizes these keys (for detailed information, see the Open TekTerm Software User Manual ,

PN 8000073).

3.3.3.1

Function Keys

Function keys perform special, custom-defined functions within an application. These keys are accessed by pressing one of the dedicated function keys on the keyboard, or through the appropriate [SHIFT] or [FN] key sequence, depending on the keyboard variant being used.

Alphanumeric Keyboard Function Keys

The Alphanumeric keyboards are equipped with up to thirty function keys, including those function keys that are colour-coded in blue print above the alpha keys or function keys (depending on your keyboard).

To access the blue function keys, press the [FN] key followed by the appropriate alpha or function key.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 25

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii

Numeric Keyboards — Accessing Alpha Keys

Function keys [F1] through [F24] can be used with the Windows Embedded CE operating system or another application. The additional function keys, [F25] through [F30] along with the macros, are not used as part of the Windows Embedded CE operating system.

Numeric Keyboard Function Keys

The Numeric keyboards are equipped with up to 24 function keys, including those function keys that are colour-coded in white print above the function keys. Function keys F25 through F30 can only be accessed by remapping another key to that function.

To access the white function keys, press the [SHIFT] key followed by the appropriate function key.

3.3.3.2

Macro Keys

Important: Refer to “Keyboard Macro Keys” on page 77 for details about creating macros.

3.3.4

Several of the Omnii keyboards are equipped with a series of macro keys that can be programmed to replace frequently used keystrokes, along with the function of executable keys like the [ENTER/Power] key, the [BACKSPACE] key, any function key and arrow key, etc.

59-Key Alphanumeric Keyboard Macro Keys

These keyboards have six macro keys: [M1] to [M6], located on the S to X keys (second-last row of keys).

To access a macro key, press the [FN] key followed by the macro key.

36-Key Numeric Keyboard Macro Keys

These keyboards are equipped with five macro keys: [M1] to [M5]. These keys are colour coded in blue print above function keys [F1] to [F5].

To access a macro key, press the [FN] key followed by the macro key.

Numeric Keyboards — Accessing Alpha Keys

On the Numeric Omnii keyboards, all alphabetic characters are printed on the unit plastic in blue typeface above the keys. Alpha characters are accessed by pressing the [FN] modifier key, then pressing another key on the keyboard.

The Alpha Modified Numeric 789 keyboard has each blue alphabetic character assigned as a single [FN]shifted character on individual keys. An indicator in the left corner of the taskbar displays the currently selected character.

The Numeric 123 keyboards have telephone-style alphabetic keys, with the blue alphabetic characters located in groups of 3 or 4 above each of the numeric keys. To access characters on these keyboards, a few extra steps are needed, as described below.

Choosing a Single Alpha Character

Note: The following examples assume that the [FN] key is enabled as ‘Lock’ mode in the ‘One Shot’ screen (accessible through the Control Panel Keyboard icon). In ‘Lock’ mode, pressing the

[FN] key once locks it ‘on’. Refer to “Keyboard One Shot Modes” on page 76 for details.

The examples below illustrate how to access A, B and C, all of which are printed in blue characters above the numeric key [2]. The letters you choose appear in the softkey bar as you press the numeric key, providing a visual indicator of which letter will be displayed on the screen.

To choose the letter ‘a’:

• Press the [FN] key, and press the numeric key [2] .

• Press the [FN] key again to unlock or turn it off.

To choose the letter ‘b’:

• Press the [FN] key, and press [2] twice.

• Press the [FN] key again to unlock or turn it off.

To choose the letter ‘c’:

26 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii

The Keypad Backlight

3.3.5

• Press the [FN] key, and press [2] three times.

• Press the [FN] key again to unlock or turn it off.

Note: Keep in mind that there is a timeout of one second between key presses when sequencing through the alphabetic characters on a key. If you pause longer than one second between key presses, the alphabetic character that is displayed at that time will be entered.

Selecting Uppercase Letters

To display a single capital letter, press the [SHIFT] key first, then the letter you want.

LOCK mode off.

The Keypad Backlight

The intensity of the keypad backlight and the conditions under which this backlight is activated can be configured using the Keyboard icon in the Windows Embedded CE Control Panel . The behaviour of the keypad backlight is tailored in the Keyboard Properties dialog box. Refer to “Keyboard Backlight” on page 76 for details about this option.

Note: Keep in mind that this option may be restricted to supervisory use only.

3.4

3.4.1

The Display

Omnii is equipped with display backlighting to improve character visibility in low light conditions. The backlight switches on when a key is pressed.

Adjusting the Display Backlight

The behaviour of the display backlight and the intensity of the backlight can be specified in the Display

Properties dialog box in the Control Panel .

Note: Refer to “Backlight” on page 68 for details about the Display Properties dialog box.

3.4.2

Calibrating the Touchscreen

If your Omnii touchscreen has never been calibrated, or if you find that the stylus pointer is not accurate when you tap on an item, use the Stylus Properties dialog box in the Control Panel to recalibrate the screen.

• In the Control Panel , choose the Stylus icon to display the Stylus Properties window.

• Select the Calibration tab, and then choose the Recalibrate button.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 27

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii

Indicators

3.5

3.5.1

• Follow the directions on the calibration screen to calibrate the screen.

Indicators

Omnii uses LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes), onscreen messages, vibrations, and audio tones as indicators.

LEDs

Omnii is equipped with four coloured LEDs. This section outlines what these LEDs indicate.

Important: If an LED is illuminated in red, the operator should be cautious as this generally indicates an abnormal operating condition or active laser emission.

Figure 3.3 LED Status Indicators

2 3 4

1. Battery Charge Status

2. Operating System Status

3. Radio Status

4. Scanner Status

28 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii

LEDs

3.5.1.1

Battery Charge Status LED

The far left LED is reserved for battery charge status. This indicator is active even when the hand-held is inserted in a docking station (and in suspend mode) so that the charge status of the battery can be detected easily.

Table 3.2

Battery Charge LED Behaviours

Charge LED Behaviour

OFF

Solid Green

Flashing Green

Yellow

Solid Red

Function

External power not detected.

Battery charging complete.

Charge in progress.

Cell temperature out of range for charge.

Unable to charge battery.

3.5.1.2

Operating System Status LED

The second LED indicates system notifications and operating system status. It is also available for userloaded custom Windows Embedded CE applications.

Table 3.3

Operating LED Behaviour

OFF when unit is in Suspend or Shutdown.

Solid Yellow

Fast Flashing Yellow

Flashing Yellow

Function

Normal operating status.

The unit is powering on.

The unit is entering Suspend mode.

This LED is controlled by the Microsoft NLED api.

3.5.1.3

Radio Status LED

The third LED from the left indicates that the GPS radio is enabled or that the WWAN radio is enabled.

Table 3.4

Radio Traffic LED Behaviour

OFF

Slow Flashing Blue

Function

The radio is disabled.

The radio is enabled and active.

3.5.1.4

Scanner Status LED

The fourth (far right) LED indicates scanner status.

Table 3.5

Scan LED Behaviour

OFF

Solid Red during scan

Solid Green after decode

OFF when scan ended

Flashing Red

Function

The scanner is not in use.

Scan in progress.

Successful scan.

Unsuccessful scan.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 29

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii

Onscreen Indicators

3.5.2

Onscreen Indicators

The taskbar at the bottom of the screen displays a variety of system status indicators, including the Input

Panel button if you have chosen to show that option in the Taskbar and Start Menu settings.

Figure 3.4 Taskbar

The taskbar changes dynamically, and only those icons that are applicable are displayed. For example, if a radio is not installed in your Omnii, the radio signal icon is not displayed in the taskbar.

Windows

Start Button

If you are using the touchscreen, you can either tap the Windows icon at the bottom left of the screen, or press the [Windows] key to display the Start Menu, and then tap on the desired application.

Modifier Key Indicators

[SHIFT], [CTRL], [ALT], [FN] and [SYM] are modifier keys that have onscreen indicators to show when a key is active or locked. If a modifier key is pressed once to activate it, the key is displayed in the taskbar, for example, pressing the [FN] key once displays ‘FN’ in the taskbar. If a modifier key is pressed twice, it is ‘locked on’ and the onscreen indicator is displayed with underlined letters in the taskbar, for example, pressing [FN] twice displays ‘FN’ in the taskbar.

Power

The battery shaped icon displayed in the taskbar provides quick access to the charge state of the battery.

Tapping on the icon once will show the percentage charge left in the battery. Tapping on the icon twice opens the Power Properties menus (see “Power Properties” on page 86), where you can set the low battery warnings levels, and time to enter Suspend.

If Omnii is using external AC power, an AC icon is displayed in the taskbar.

802.11 Radio Signal Quality

Increasing radio signal quality is represented by longer, filled bars within this icon.

Good

Reception

Weak

Reception

No Radio

Link

30 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii

Audio Indicators

Docking Device

When a hand-held is inserted in a docking station, charger or cradle, an associated icon appears in the taskbar.

Combo Charger &

Combo Docking Station

Quad Docking Station Powered Vehicle Cradle, Desktop Dock

& Snap Module

3.5.3

3.5.4

3.6

Bluetooth Radio

This icon displayed in the taskbar represents the installed Bluetooth radio.

Input Panel

You can tap the Input Panel icon to activate the soft keyboard application.

Audio Indicators

Omnii supports several audio options, including Bluetooth . The optional rear speaker can be used for system (Windows) sounds and .

wav files. When a rear speaker is absent, those sounds are routed to the front receiver. The beeper provides a variety of sounds and can be configured to emit a sound when a key is pressed, a keyboard character is rejected, scan input is accepted or rejected, an operator’s entry does not match in a match field or the battery is low. The volume rocker button is located on the left side of the hand-held. Information on configuring sounds is detailed in “Volume & Sounds Properties” on page 120.

Vibrations

You can set Omnii to vibrate when a successful or unsuccessful barcode scan is performed. See “Scanners”, page 96.

Inserting the microSD Card and SIM Card

There are two slots available in the battery compartment—the lower slot is provided for a microSD (Secure

Digital) card, which provides additional non-volatile memory to your Omnii, and the upper slot is for a SIM

(Subscriber Identity Module) card, which allows access to the Voice option, access to the Internet, and so on.

SD Cover

OPEN

LOCK microSD Card Slot

SIM Card Slot

3.6.1

Inserting the Cards

• Switch off the power to Omnii.

• Remove the battery.

• Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the SD cover screw. Flip the cover open or remove it.

For a microSD card:

• Slide the microSD card door to the left to unlock it. Flip it open.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 31

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii

Scanners and Imagers

• Slide the microSD card into the guides on the SD card door.

• Close the microSD card door, and slide it to the right to lock it.

M icro

For a SIM card:

• Slide the SIM card metal door latch to the right to unlock it, then flip the door open.

• Slide the card into the guides on the SIM card door.

• Swing the hinged door back down into place, and slide the metal door latch to the left to lock it.

3.7 Scanners and Imagers

Important: It is critical that you review the “Laser Warnings” in the Omnii Hand-Held Computer Regulatory & Warranty Guide (PN 8000191) before using any of the scanners described in this chapter.

For detailed scanner specifications and decode zone tables, refer to Appendix E:

“Internal Imager & Scanner Specifications” .

Note: To enable a newly-installed imager or scanner, press and hold down the [FN] key and the

[ENTER/Power] key simultaneously for a minimum of three seconds.

If your unit has a [Power] button, press and hold down the [FN] key and the [Power] button for a minimum of three seconds.

Omnii supports a wide range of scanner options to address a variety of user application requirements.

Refer to the following sections for detailed information:

• Scanner list and specifications: Appendix E: “Internal Imager & Scanner Specifications” .

• Configuration: “Scanners” on page 96 and “Manage Triggers” on page 82.

• “Scanning Techniques” on page 33 outlines the mechanics of a successful scan.

• “Scanner Status LED, Sounds, and Vibrations” on page 33 details how to interpret whether or not a barcode has been successfully scanned.

• Barcode Parameters: Appendix D: “Scanner Settings”.

• Imager Settings: Appendix C: “Imager & Camera Settings”.

• “Troubleshooting” on page 33 provides some helpful suggestions should the scan fail.

Scanner types include:

• Long Range: reads large 1D barcodes (55 mil) at long distances (up to 3m).

• Standard Range/High Performance: reads damaged or low contrast regular 1D barcodes (5 - 55mil) at medium distances (up to 1m).

• Extended Range: reads regular 1D barcodes (5 - 55mil) at short to medium distances (1m), as well as large 1D barcodes (e.g. 55 mil) at long distances.

• 1D Imager: reads regular 1D and PDF417 barcodes at short to medium distances.

32 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

3.7.1

3.7.2

3.7.3

3.7.4

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii

Basic Scanner Operations

• EA11 2D imager: reads 1D and 2D barcodes including damaged and low contrast regular 1D barcodes; smallest barcode at 5 mil with a minimum read distance to 2.8 in. / maximum read distance of 5.1 in.; largest barcode at 40 mil with a minimum read distance of 3.1 in. / maximum distance of 32.4 in.

• EA20X 2D imager: reads 1D and 2D barcodes including damaged and low contrast regular 1D barcodes; shortest barcode at 6 mil with a minimum read distance of 6.1 inches / maximum read distance of 9.1 inches; longest barcode at 40 mil with a minimum read distance of 5.1 inches / maximum read distance of 49.2 inches.

Basic Scanner Operations

• Turn the hand-held on. Wait until the unit has booted up completely.

• Aim at the barcode and press the scan key or the trigger. A scan beam and a warning indicator appear until a successful decode is achieved or six seconds have elapsed.

Scanning Techniques

• Hold the scanner at an angle. Do not hold it perpendicular to the barcode.

• Do not hold the scanner directly over the barcode. In this position, light can reflect back into the scanner’s exit window and prevent a successful decode.

• Scan the entire barcode. If you are using a 1D or PDF laser scanner, make certain that the scan beam crosses every bar and space on the barcode, including the margins on either end of the symbol.

• If you are using a 2D imaging scanner, make certain the red, oval shaped framing mark is centered within the barcode you want to scan.

• When using imaging scanners, do not move the scanner while decoding the barcode. Movement blurs the image.

• Hold the scanner farther away for larger barcodes.

• Hold the scanner closer for barcodes with bars that are close together.

Scanner Status LED, Sounds, and Vibrations

The scanner LED (the far right LED) indicates whether or not your scan is successful. The LED behaves as follows:

• Scan In Progress: scan LED displays solid red colour.

• Successful Scan: scan LED displays solid green colour and turns off when the scan is ended.

• Unsuccessful scan: scan LED flashes red.

A barcode icon appears on the screen during a scan. While the scanner beam is active, the onscreen message states: SCANNING. If you want to turn off the onscreen message, disable the “Scan Indicator” parameter in the Control Panel>Scanners>Options>Display menu .

When the scan is successful, the barcode data is displayed on the screen until the scan button (or pistol trigger) is released, but only if the “Scan Result” parameter is turned on in the Control Panel>Scanners>Options>Display menu .

You can also enable sounds and vibrations to indicate good and bad scans by enabling those options in the

Control Panel>Scanners>Options>Display menu .

Troubleshooting

If the scanner is not working, investigate the following:

• Is the unit on?

• Check that the barcode symbology being scanned is enabled for the hand-held you are using. Check any other parameters that affect the scanning procedure or the barcode.

• Check the barcode to make sure it is not damaged. Try scanning a different barcode to verify that the problem is not with the barcode.

• Check that the barcode is within the proper range.

• Does the hand-held display the warning without scanning? This suggests a hardware problem in the hand-held.

• Is the laser beam scanning across the barcode?

• Once the scan beam has stopped, check the scanner window for dirt or fogging.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 33

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii

Operating One Dimensional (1D) Internal Laser Scanners

3.7.5

3.7.6

3.8

3.8.1

Operating One Dimensional (1D) Internal Laser Scanners

• Turn the hand-held on. Wait until the unit has booted up completely.

Important: If an aiming dot is available on the installed scanner, the dot will be enabled for a configurable time period (including off), after which normal scanning begins. Refer to “Dot Time (msec)” on page -5 for details.

Double-clicking the trigger will override the aiming delay and initiate an immediate scan. Note that the aiming dot is standard on long-range and high visibility internal scanners.

• Aim at the barcode and press the scan key or the trigger. A scan beam and a warning indicator appear until a successful decode is achieved or six seconds have elapsed.

Operating Internal Two Dimensional (2D) Imagers

An imager scanner takes a snap shot of a single barcode or multiple barcodes (at one time). It can find a barcode regardless of its orientation—that is, even a barcode printed at a 45 degree angle to the hand-held will be decoded successfully.

Note: When scanning multiple barcodes, ensure that all of the desired barcodes are within the field of view of the scanner. It is possible that even when all barcodes are within the field of view, not all of them will be decoded. Only successfully decoded barcodes are passed to the application program. The application program then issues a warning, asking that you scan the missing barcodes.

When scanning a single barcode, ensure that only the desired barcode is within the field of view of the scanner.

Because imager scanners generally have a shorter depth of field than laser scanners, some practise may be required to find the optimal distance from the types of barcodes being scanned. Although the imager includes illumination LEDs, ambient light will help the imager decode the barcodes, especially if the barcode is far from the hand-held.

Important: Keep in mind that the imager scanner is a camera, and the LED illumination is a flash. Glare can be an issue on reflective media such as plastic coated barcodes, just as glare is an issue for photographers. When pointing at a shiny surface, either shift the barcode to the side or top, or angle the barcode so that the glare reflects away from the imager scanner.

Most imagers take several ‘snap shots’ of the barcode in order to decode it. It is normal for the LEDs to flash two or three times. Hold the unit steady between flashes to improve decode performance.

• Turn the hand-held computer on. Wait until the unit has booted up completely.

• Aim at the barcode and press the scan key or the trigger. Hold the trigger until a successful or failed scan result is obtained.

• When the scan button or trigger is pressed, a red, oval shaped light (the framing marker) is displayed.

Centre the framing marker in the field—either in the centre of the barcode you want to scan or in the centre of the area in which multiple barcodes are to be scanned.

The illumination LEDs will flash (typically several times) and a picture of the barcode is taken.

Windows Embedded CE 6.0

Navigating in Windows Embedded CE and Applications

Graphic user interfaces like Windows Embedded CE for portable devices and desktop Windows (2000, XP, etc.) utilize ‘point and click’ navigation. An equivalent keyboard shortcut is also available for every ‘point and click’ action.

Windows Embedded CE supports the same ‘point and click’ user interface and keyboard shortcuts as desktop Windows with one difference—the ‘point and click’ action is accomplished using a touchscreen

34 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii

The Windows Classic Shell Startup Desktop

3.8.1.1

3.8.2

rather than a mouse. Actions can be performed using any combination of keyboard shortcuts or touchscreen tapping. In those applications that support it, you can also flick and pan your finger to scroll through screens.

Navigating Using a Touchscreen

Note: If the touchscreen is not registering your screen taps accurately, the touchscreen may need recalibration. Refer to “Calibrating the Touchscreen” on page 27.

Omnii comes equipped with a stylus—a pointing tool that looks like a pen. The stylus is used to select objects on the touchscreen. You can also use gestures with your fingers. You can use two gestures: pan and flick.

Use left or right flicks to quickly move between tabs of a multi-tab control panel, or to scroll long lists of options. Use panning by touching and dragging a page that has scrollbars.

Note: To prevent damage to the touchscreen, use only a finger touch or the stylus (pen) supplied with your Omnii.

To choose an icon, open a file, launch an applet or open a folder:

• Double-tap on the appropriate icon.

3.8.1.2

Navigating Using the Keyboard

If you would like to use keyed input to choose icons and navigating dialog boxes, displaying the desktop you can refer to Table 3.6 for a description of the navigation keys.

Table 3.6

Keyboard Navigation

Operation

Switch between active applications

Open task manager

Move the cursor

Open file, folder or icon

Exit & Save

Close/Exit & Do Not Save

Navigate Dialog Boxes

Select Radio Button/Press Button

Go to Start Menu

Key or Key Combination

[ALT] [TAB]

[ALT] [ESC]

Arrow keys

[ENTER]

[ESC]

[TAB]

To move cursor up [SHIFT] [TAB]

To display the contents of the next ‘tab’ in a dialog box

[CTRL] [TAB]

[SPACE]

[Windows]

Keep in mind that unlike a desktop computer, Omnii does not support key chording (pressing two keys at the same time). You must press one key followed by the next in sequence.

The Windows Classic Shell Startup Desktop

When Omnii boots up, the default startup desktop (Windows Classic Shell) is displayed. Any applications stored in the Startup folder start up immediately.

Note: The startup folder is located in \Windows\StartUp and \Flash Disk\StartUp.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 35

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii

The Windows Classic Shell Startup Desktop

Figure 3.5 Omnii Windows Classic Shell Startup Desktop

To access desktop icons:

• Double-tap on the icon to open a window or, in the case of an application icon, launch an application.

On the keyboard:

• Use the arrow keys to highlight the icon, and press [ENTER] to launch the highlighted icon.

Note: If the arrow keys do not highlight the desktop icons, the desktop may not be selected. Press

[Windows] to display the Start Menu, and select Desktop. Now the desktop will be “in focus” and the arrow keys will highlight the icons.

3.8.2.1

The Taskbar

Omnii is equipped with a taskbar at the bottom of the screen. It displays icons through which you can view the battery capacity and radio signal quality of your unit. If the hand-held is attached to a charger, cradle, docking station, or Snap Module, an associated icon is displayed. In addition, the taskbar displays the application(s) currently running on your unit.

The taskbar also displays active modifier keys: [SHIFT], [ALT], [CTRL], [FN] and [SYM]. Keys that have been locked “on” are displayed with underlined letters. For example, if you have set the [CTRL] key lock to “on” in

36 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii

The Windows Classic Shell Startup Desktop the Keyboard menu and you press the key, it is displayed as an underlined ‘Ctrl’ in the taskbar. (For detailed information on modifier keys and keyboard options, see “The Keyboard” on page 22).

3.8.2.1.1

Using the Taskbar

A tooltip is displayed as each taskbar icon is highlighted. The tooltip provides the status of each icon.

If you’re using the touchscreen:

• Tap and hold on an icon to display the icon's tooltip. Double-tap the icon to open the Control Panel dialog box associated with the icon. For example, double-tap the battery icon to display a dialog box listing the current battery capacity information.

On the keyboard:

• Press [Windows] to display the Start Menu .

• Choose Shortcuts from the Start Menu , and then press the [RIGHT] arrow key to display the submenu.

• Choose System Tray in the sub-menu.

• Use the arrow keys to highlight the icon in the taskbar about which you’d like more information.

• Press [ENTER] to display the appropriate dialog box.

3.8.2.1.2 Customizing the Taskbar

To customize the taskbar so that it displays only those icons you require:

• In the Start Menu , choose Settings , and then Taskbar .

If you’re using the keyboard:

• Press [Windows] to display the Start Menu .

• Highlight the Settings option, highlight Taskbar in the sub-menu, and press [ENTER] .

The Taskbar and Start Menu dialog box is displayed.

• Tap on the items you want to activate or deactivate. The check mark indicates active items.

If you’re using the keyboard:

• Highlight the options you want to activate, and press the [SPACE] key to select them. A check mark indicates active items.

3.8.2.2

The Start Menu

The Start Menu lists the operations you can access and work with. It is available from the startup desktop or from within any application.

• To display the menu, tap on the Start Menu .

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 37

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii

The Windows Classic Shell Startup Desktop

Note: Tap on the item in the menu with which you want to work.

If you’re using the keyboard:

• Use the arrow keys to highlight a menu item, and press [ENTER] , or

If the menu item has an underlined character:

• Type the underlined alpha character. For example, to display the Run dialog box, type the letter ‘ r’ .

3.8.2.2.1 Programs

• Choose Programs to display a sub-menu of options. The programs displayed will be those resident in the Windows\Programs folder of the computer.

Figure 3.6 Program Sub-Menu

This sub-menu allows you to choose Command Prompt , Internet Explorer , installed applications (e.g., Microsoft WordPad), PsionVU Access, Remote Desktop Connection , Wi-Fi Config , or Windows Explorer .

Demo

This folder contains the Scanner Demo , Demo Signature and Demo Sound applications. Scanner Demo can be used to test how the hand-held reads and writes barcodes. Demo Signature allows you to capture a signature written on the screen with your stylus and save it to a file. Demo Sound allows you to record and playback sound files. The ‘Sample Rate’ and the ‘Bits Per Sample’ are the rates at which the sound will be

38 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii

The Windows Classic Shell Startup Desktop recorded. Sounds recorded at the higher sample rate or bits per sample will be higher quality sound but will require more file storage space. Lower sample rates and/or bits per sample produces a smaller file, but the sound quality suffers. The record and play buttons operate the same as any recording device. The X icon deletes the sound and the diskette icon allows you to save your sound.

Command Prompt

Command Prompt is used to access the DOS command prompt. At the prompt, you can type DOS commands such as dir to display all the directories in the drive.

Internet Explorer

Omnii is equipped with Microsoft Internet Explorer for Windows Embedded CE. You can access the Internet

Options icon through the Start Menu under Settings>Control Panel or by double-tapping on the desktop icon My Device and then, double-tapping on the Control Panel icon.

Microsoft WordPad

WordPad is a basic word processor used to create, edit, and print .rtf

, .doc

, and .txt

files.

PsionVU Access

PsionVU Access allows you to change the appearance and actions of the desktop from the default Windows

Classic Shell to the PsionVU shell.

Remote Desktop Connection

Remote Desktop Connection is an Omnii application used to connect to a Windows Terminal Server so that you can run a “session” on the Server machine using the hand-held (Windows Embedded CE device).

“Remote Desktop Connection” on page 95 provides a website with details about this option.

Wi-Fi Config

The Wi-Fi Config application is used to configure the Omnii 802.11a/b/g/n radio for one or more wireless network profiles.

Windows Explorer

The Windows Explorer installed on your Omnii is consistent with all Windows Embedded CE devices.

3.8.2.2.2 Shortcuts

Figure 3.7

Shortcuts Sub-Menu

System Tray

If your touchscreen is not enabled, you can use the System Tray option to access the icons in the taskbar at the bottom of the screen. The taskbar displays indicators such as a radio signal icon. These indicators are attached to dialog boxes that provide additional information.

• Choose Shortcuts>System Tray .

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 39

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii

The Windows Classic Shell Startup Desktop

When System Tray is chosen, the taskbar icons become accessible. To display the dialog box attached to an icon:

• Use the arrow keys to highlight an icon, for example, the Bluetooth icon.

• Press [ENTER] to display the Bluetooth menus.

Cycle Tasks

When Cycle Tasks is selected (and the Task Manager is not open), you can cycle through active applications.

To cycle through your active applications:

• Choose Shortcuts>Cycle Tasks , or

• Press [ ALT] [TAB] .

Task Manager

The Task Manager allows you to switch to another task or to end an active task. To display the task manager window:

• Tap on Shortcuts>Task Manager , or

• Press [ALT] [ESC] .

3.8.2.2.3 Settings

The Settings sub-menu includes the following settings: Control Panel , Network and Dial-up Connections and Taskbar and Start Menu .

Figure 3.8 Settings Sub-Menu

40 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii

The Windows Classic Shell Startup Desktop

Control Panel

The Control Panel contains applets used to configure hardware, the operating system and the shell. If your

Omnii is running with the Psion Open TekTerm application or another application, additional configuration applets may appear in the Control Panel .

Network and Dial-Up Connections

The Network and Dial-up Connections window allows you to configure the Omnii network interfaces or execute an existing configuration. Refer to “Connectivity” on page 17 for radio setup details.

Taskbar and Start Menu

The Taskbar and Start Menu option displays a dialog box in which you can customize the taskbar, choosing which options will be displayed. Refer to “Customizing the Taskbar” on page 37 for additional details about this option.

3.8.2.2.4 Run

Choosing the Run option from the Start Menu displays a dialog box in which you can enter the name of the program, folder or document you want to open or launch.

3.8.2.2.5 Shutdown

The Shutdown menu includes these options: Suspend, Warm Reset and Cold Reset .

Suspend

The Suspend option suspends Omnii immediately. This is equivalent to turning the hand-held off.

Warm Reset

The Warm Reset option resets the hand-held, leaving all saved files and registry settings intact. Any unsaved data is lost.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 41

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii

The PsionVU Desktop Shell

3.9

Cold Reset

The Cold Reset option resets the hand-held (see page 16). Any files not stored in permanent memory are lost; however, the registry settings are saved.

The PsionVU Desktop Shell

The appearance and actions of the desktop can be changed by tapping on the PsionVU Shell icon on your desktop, which activates the PsionVU shell.

Note: Omnii will be reset if you choose to switch shells.

Figure 3.9 Switch to PsionVU Shell

After resetting the Omnii, the desktop appearance will be very different. The programs are accessed with finger (or stylus) taps and swipes. If there are more applications than shown on one screen, a white animated dot will be present on the side of the screen in the direction of the next set of icons. Swiping the screen to that direction will move the display to the next screen.

Note: Although the Desktop appearance defaults to the “Ingenuity” theme, the theme is not changed using the PsionVU Shell icon. To change themes, open the Shell Settings>Advanced menu in PsionVU Access (see “Shell Settings” on page 92).

42 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii

The PsionVU Desktop Shell

Hold the stylus or your finger on the Active Tasks, Favourites, or Notifications Bar, and swipe to the left or right to switch to the next screen.

Active Tasks Bar

Favourites Bar

Notifications Bar

A different program, PsionVU Access , enables you to customize your computer settings, remove or add shortcuts to the Favourites Bar and Control Panel, and limit access to various different components on the computer and the system tray icons for security. For details see “PsionVU Access” on page 90. To change your Desktop background, refer to “Shell Settings” on page 92.

Active Tasks Bar

Open applications are shown in the top bar—the most recently opened is the first icon on the left. Tapping once on a program icon will maximize the application. This feature replaces the Task Manager of the

Windows Classic Shell.

Date/Time Bar

Tapping once on the date or time will open the Date/Time Properties settings to enable you to change your settings and time zone.

Favourites Bar

The Favourites Bar replaces the Windows Classic Shell’s Desktop and Start Menu. These icons are the program shortcuts from your Windows>Start Menu . Tapping once will open the program. If you tap and hold on an icon, the application name is displayed.

Notifications Bar

This bar shows the run-time program notifications for Battery , Volume , Wi-Fi , Phone or GPRS , and other notifications for the programs you are running. This feature replaces the Taskbar of the Windows Classic

Shell.

Desktop Minimized View

When an application is opened and maximized, the desktop view is minimized and the Notifications Bar is shown at the bottom of the screen. Tapping anywhere on the Notifications Bar (except on the SIP) will restore the PsionVU desktop.

Note: In order to use the SIP, turn on the automatic settings in Control Panel>Input Panel .

PsionVU Access

The PsionVU Access program allows you to open a different program, PsionVU , which enables you to customize your computer settings, remove or add shortcuts to the Favourites Bar and Control Panel, and limit access to various different components on the computer and the system tray icons for security. For details

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 43

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii

Restoring the Windows Classic Shell see “PsionVU Access” on page 90. To change your Desktop background, refer to “Shell Settings” on page 92.

To open PsionVU:

• Tap on the PsionVU Access icon in the Favourites Bar .

3.9.1

Restoring the Windows Classic Shell

The default Desktop appearance and actions can be restored by tapping on the PsionVU Shell icon in the

Favourites Bar .

Figure 3.10 Shell Switch to Windows Classic Shell Desktop

Note: Omnii will be reset if you choose to switch shells.

3.10

3.10.1

General Maintenance

Caring for the Touchscreen

The touchscreen is covered with a thin, flexible polyester plastic sheet with a conductive coating on the inside. The polyester can be permanently damaged by harsh chemicals and is susceptible to abrasions and scratches. Using sharp objects on the touchscreen can scratch or cut the plastic, or crack the internal conductive coating. The chemicals listed below must not come into contact with the touchscreen:

• mustard

• ketchup

• sodium hydroxide

• concentrated caustic solutions

• benzyl alcohol

• concentrated acids

If the touchscreen is used in harsh environments, consider applying a disposable screen protector (ST6112).

These covers reduce the clarity of the display slightly but will dramatically extend the useful life of the touchscreen. When they become scratched and abraded, they are easily removed and replaced.

44 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii

Cleaning Omnii

3.10.2

Cleaning Omnii

Important: Do not immerse the unit in water. Dampen a soft cloth with mild detergent to wipe the unit clean.

To prevent damage to the touchscreen, use only your finger or the stylus (pen) supplied with your Omnii.

• Use only mild detergent or soapy water to clean the hand-held unit.

• Avoid abrasive cleaners, solvents or strong chemicals for cleaning. Omnii has a plastic case that is susceptible to harsh chemicals. The plastic is partially soluble in oils, mineral spirits and gasoline. The plastic slowly decomposes in strong alkaline solutions.

• To clean ink marks from the keypad and touchscreen, use isopropyl alcohol.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 45

CONFIGURATION

4.1

Overview of Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

4.1.1

Psion Software Advantage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

4.1.2

Microsoft Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

4.2

The Control Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

4.2.1

Control Panel Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

4.3

App Launch Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

4.4

Bluetooth® Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

4.4.1

Paired . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

4.4.2

Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

4.4.2.1

Discovering and Removing Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

4.4.2.2

Filtering By Class of Device (COD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

4.4.2.3

Device Pop-up Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

4.4.2.4

Pairing a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

4.4.3

Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

4.4.4 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

4.4.5 About . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

4.4.6 The Bluetooth GPRS WAN Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

4.5

Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

4.6

Data Transfer between Omnii and a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

4.6.1

Uploading Data in a Docking Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

4.6.2 Using Microsoft ActiveSync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

4.6.3 Using Windows Mobile Device Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

4.7

Display Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

4.7.1

Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

4.7.2

Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

4.7.3

Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

4.8

Dr. Debug. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

4.8.1

Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

4.8.2 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

4.8.3 Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

4.9

Error Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

4.10 GPS (Global Positioning System) Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

4.10.1

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

4.10.2 Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

4.10.3 Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

4.10.4 AGPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

4.10.5 Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

4.11

Imager & Camera Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

4.12

Input Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

4.12.1

Keyboard Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

4.12.1.1

Key Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

4.12.1.2

Keyboard Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

4.12.1.3

Keyboard One Shot Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

4.12.1.4

Keyboard Macro Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

4.12.1.5

Unicode Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 47

4.12.1.6

Scancode Remapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

4.12.1.7

Lock Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

4.13

Manage Triggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

4.13.1

Trigger Mappings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

4.13.2 Add and Edit Trigger Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

4.14

Microphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

4.15

Open TekTerm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

4.16

PartnerUp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

4.17

Pocket PC Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

4.18 Power Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

4.18.1

Battery Capacity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

4.18.2 Power Saving Suspend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

4.18.3 Suspend Threshold and Estimated Battery Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

4.18.4 Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

4.18.5 Built-in Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

4.18.6 Battery Health . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

4.19

PsionVU Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

4.19.1

Administrator Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

4.19.2 Shell Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

4.19.3 Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

4.19.4 Control Panel Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

4.19.5 Import/Export to File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

4.20 Remote Desktop Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

4.21

Scanners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

4.21.1

Barcodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

4.21.1.1

Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

4.21.1.2

Restoring Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

4.21.2 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

4.21.2.1

Double Click Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

4.21.2.2 Display Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

4.21.2.3 Data Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

4.21.3 Translations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

4.21.3.1

Case Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

4.21.4 Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

4.21.4.1

Port Replicator Port A (COM5) and Port B (COM6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

4.22 Screen Rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103

4.23 Storage Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103

4.23.1 Formatting a Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103

4.23.2 Creating Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

4.23.3 Partition Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105

4.24 Stylus Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107

4.24.1 Double-Tap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107

4.24.2 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107

4.24.3 Touch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

4.25 System Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

4.26 Total Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109

4.26.1 Creating a Backup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109

4.26.2 Creating a Clone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

4.26.3 Managing Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

4.26.3.1 Viewing a Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

48 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

4.26.3.2 Profile Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

4.26.4 Deleting a Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

4.27 TweakIt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

4.27.1 Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

4.27.1.1

Advanced CE Services Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

4.27.1.2

Advanced Interface and Network Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

4.27.1.3

Advanced Services Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

4.27.2 User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

4.27.2.1

User Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

4.27.3 TweakIt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

4.28 Voice – Using the WWAN Phone Dialer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

4.28.1 Dialing a Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

4.28.2 Receiving an Incoming Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

4.28.3 Voice Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

4.28.4 File Menu – Phonebook Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

4.29 Volume & Sounds Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120

4.29.1 Volume Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120

4.29.2 Sound Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

4.30 Wi-Fi Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

4.30.1 Wi-Fi Config: Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

4.30.2 Wi-Fi Config: Configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

4.30.2.1 Authentication Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

4.30.2.2 Encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

4.30.2.3 EAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

4.30.2.4 Verify Server Certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

4.30.2.5 Enable OPMK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

4.30.2.6 Connecting the Wireless Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

4.30.3 Configuring TCP/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

4.30.3.1 IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

4.30.3.2 Name Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

4.30.4 Wi-Fi Config: Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

4.30.5 Monitoring the Network Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 49

4.1

4.1.1

4.1.2

4.2

Chapter 4: Configuration

Overview of Software

Omnii programs and applications are accessed through two main areas from the Desktop: Programs and

Settings> Control Panel . This chapter details the configuration for the major software from both areas, listed alphabetically.

Psion Software Advantage

Psion Software Advantage is a collection of applications and features designed to support system administrators and end users. These tools enable enterprises to customize the product to meet their needs and to maximize productivity.

AGPS

App Launch Keys

Battery Health

Bluetooth Manager

Dr. Debug

PartnerUp

Psion A.R.C. Client

PsionVu

TweakIt

Scanner

Total Recall

Manage Triggers

WiFi Config

Microsoft Software

Windows CE 6.0 R3 is a 32-bit, real-time, multitasking Operating System. The OS features a small footprint, with compatibility to port existing Win32 applications and Touch & Gesture support.

Some of the major WCE 6.0 R3 components are:

Control Panel, where both Psion Advantage and Microsoft applications are grouped

Flash Lite

Internet Explorer Embedded

Microsoft WordPad

Remote Desktop Connection

Windows Explorer

The Control Panel

The Windows Embedded CE Control Panel provides a group of applications through which you can set a variety of system-wide properties, such as power, keyboard sensitivity, network configuration, system backup, desktop appearance, and so on.

When Omnii boots up, the startup desktop (Windows Classic Shell) is displayed, and any applications stored in the Startup folder start up immediately.

To access the Control Panel :

• Press [Windows] to display the Start Menu .

• Tap on Settings > Control Panel .

If you’re using the keyboard:

• Press [Windows] to display the Start Menu .

• Highlight Settings in Start Menu , and press the [RIGHT] arrow key to highlight the Control Panel .

• Press the [ENTER] key.

The Control Panel folder contains icons used in the setup of your Omnii.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 51

Chapter 4: Configuration

Control Panel Applications

Figure 4.1

Control Panel Icons

4.2.1

Control Panel Applications

The Control Panel provides a group of applications that allow you to customize and adjust settings on your

Omnii. This section shows the related icons in the Control Panel and gives a brief description of each.

App Launch Keys

By mapping keys to applications using this program, you can then launch those applications from a single key-press.

Bluetooth

Opens the Bluetooth Manager which provides options for configuring various Bluetooth peripherals. It also provides the capability to use a Bluetooth -enabled cellular phone as a data modem to exchange information with other Bluetooth devices and provide network access.

Certificates

This program provides access to the Certificates Manager and Stores. The Certificates Manager displays the certificates in the Windows Certificates Store, and allows you to import, delete, and view these certificates. “Certificates” on page 65 directs you to the appropriate setup information.

Date/Time

Allows you to set the current Month, Date, Time, and Time Zone on your unit.

Dialing

Specifies dialing settings, including area code, country code, dial type and the code to disable call waiting.

You can store multiple patterns—for example, ‘Work’, ‘Home’, and so on using this dialog box.

Display

Changes the display backlight and the appearance (colour scheme) on the unit desktop.

Dr. Debug

Provides both error diagnostic and troubleshooting tools.

Error Reporting

Allows you to enable or disable Microsoft error reporting prompts.

GPS Settings

Allows you to enable and configure GPS operation.

52 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration

Control Panel Applications

Imagers

The Imagers applet is used to create, modify, delete, and activate imager settings. This icon is only present when the appropriate imager is installed. For detailed information, see Appendix C: “Imager & Camera Settings”.

Input Panel

Provides the framework for a Microsoft Soft Input Panel (SIP) should you need to design your own SIP, or change some soft keyboard options.

Internet Options

Provides options to configure your Internet browser. You can determine items such as the default and search page that the browser applies when connecting to the Internet, the cache size, the Internet connection options, and the security level that is applied when browsing.

Keyboard

Toggles character repeat on and off and specifies delay and rate for repeated characters. It also allows you to adjust the keyboard backlight threshold and intensity, and many other functions.

Manage Triggers

This utility allows you to define buttons as triggers for different devices. For example you would use this utility to configure a button for the scanner, RFID reader, and camera.

Microphone

Enables you to adjust the gain for the specific microphones associated with your hand-held.

Network and Dial-up Connections

Displays network interfaces and allows new dial-up and VPN interfaces to be created. It also allows Windows configuration of the interface. Refer to “Connectivity” on page 17 for details.

Owner

Provides fields in which you can specify owner information. A Notes tab allows additional information to be entered and displayed when the unit is powered up. Network ID tab information is used to access network resources. (This information should be provided by your System Administrator.)

PartnerUp

This app displays a number of pre-loaded applications. By tapping on an application in the list, you are taken to the associated web site and allowed to install the application.

Password

Allows you to assign a password to restrict access to elements of the unit. Once assigned, password access cannot be circumvented so it is important that you write down your password and keep it in a safe place.

PC Connection

Enables direct connection to a desktop computer (or through ActiveSync—see “Data Transfer” on page 17).

Selecting the Change Connection button allows you to change the type of direct connection to your PC.

Power

Displays battery pack power status. (Alternately, battery status can be accessed through the taskbar.) Additional tabs allow you to determine suspend states and specify a suspend threshold.

PsionVU

PsionVU enables you to customize your computer settings, remove or add shortcuts to the desktop and

Control Panel, and lock down access to various different components on the computer and the system tray icons for security. With PsionVU and PsionVU Shell (see “The PsionVU Desktop Shell” on page 42) you can customize the entire look and feel of your User Experience.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 53

Chapter 4: Configuration

Control Panel Applications

Region and Language

Allows you to specify the local language that is to be displayed on the hand-held screen along with the format of numbers, currency, time and date for your region.

Remove Programs

Lists the programs that can be removed from your unit. To remove a program, select it and then click on the Remove button.

Scanners

Provides scanner parameters and the barcode symbologies that the Omnii barcode scanner will successfully read.

Screen Rotation

This feature enables you to change screen orientation into either landscape, portrait, or both modes.

Storage Manager

Allows you to view information about the storage devices that are present, such as SD-MMC flash cards. For details, see page 103.

Stylus

Adjusts how Windows Embedded CE recognizes your double-tap (as slow or rapid successive taps). In the

Calibration tab, you can recalibrate your touchscreen by tapping on the Recalibrate button and following the directions on the screen.

System

You can display the system and memory properties, as well as create your device name. In the Memory tab, you can allocate memory between storage memory and program memory.

System Properties

Identifies the computer’s software and hardware components, indicating which components are installed, their version or part numbers, and whether they are enabled or disabled.

Total Recall

Provides access to a backup\restore and deployment utility to maintain applications and settings over cold reboots and for multiple devices.

TweakIt

Allows you to change Advanced System Settings (interface, network, and servers), User System Settings

(display font size), and provides the Registry Editor.

Volume & Sounds

Allows you to adjust the volume of the sound emitted to indicate events like warnings, key clicks, and screen taps. You can also configure system (Windows) sounds and .

wav files.

Wireless WAN

Provides access to technology like GSM/GPRS, which allows wide area networking capability such as internet browsing via GSM/GPRS. It also provides access to the Phone API. For detailed information, see

Appendix F: “Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN) Settings”.

54 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

4.3

Chapter 4: Configuration

App Launch Keys

The App Launch Keys icon allows you to map a key to an application so that you can then launch the application from a single key-press.

• In the Control Panel , choose the App Launch Keys icon.

To assign an application key:

• Tap the Add button.

• Press the key you want to use to launch an application. (If an unsupported key is pressed, a message appears on this screen letting you know.)

The cursor moves to the App field and a new screen is displayed where you can choose the application to which you want to assign the application key. If you need to, you can Browse through the information in your Omnii until you locate the application you want to launch.

• Once you’ve selected the file you want to map, tap on OK .

The cursor moves to the Data field. You can use this field if you need to need to define command line parameters for your application. If you don’t want to assign any parameters, you can leave the Data field blank. If, for example, you want to assign an application launch key to launch the WordPad application, you can leave this field blank. If you want to assign an application launch key that will open a specific document in the WordPad application, you need to browse to and choose that document while the cursor is in the Data field.

• Tap on OK .

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 55

Chapter 4: Configuration

Bluetooth

Setup

4.4

• If you need to Edit, Remove or Add another App Launch Key , you can do it from this final screen. Otherwise, tap on OK to save your Application Launch Key .

• To launch the application you chose, press the application key you assigned.

Bluetooth

Setup

Bluetooth is a global standard for wireless connectivity for digital devices and is intended for Personal Area

Networks (PAN). The technology is based on a short-range radio link that operates in the ISM band at

2.4 GHz. When two Bluetooth -equipped devices come within a 10 metre (32 ft.) range of each other, they can establish a connection. Because Bluetooth utilizes a radio-based link, it does not require a line-of-sight connection in order to communicate.

It is possible to communicate with a variety of Bluetooth peripherals, including GSM/GPRS handsets, scanners, printers, and so on.

Psion provides built-in support for:

• GSM/GPRS universal handset

• Bluetooth printer

• Bluetooth headset

Keep in mind that Bluetooth and IEEE 802.11g radios both operate in the 2.4GHz band. Although Omnii includes features to minimize interference, performance of the system will not be optimal if you use both radios simultaneously. Typically, when both radios operate in the hand-held at the same time, they cannot transmit simultaneously—this has a negative impact on overall system throughput. To minimize the impact on the backbone 802.11 network, Psion recommends using Bluetooth peripherals that have low transaction rates (such as printers and scanners).

Bluetooth peripherals are configured by choosing the Bluetooth icon in the Control Panel . In addition, review the manual shipped with your Bluetooth device to determine the method used to associate with the

Omnii host.

Note: The Bluetooth radio uses an internal antenna.

• In the Control Panel , choose the Bluetooth icon to display the Bluetooth Manager screen.

The Bluetooth Manager allows users to search, pair and connect to other Bluetooth devices within their personal area network.

The Bluetooth radio is disabled by default. Before you begin the setup process:

• Tap on the Mode tab, and tap in the checkbox next to Turn on Bluetooth . Tap on OK .

When the radio is enabled, a Bluetooth icon appears the taskbar at the bottom of the screen. It is ready for setup.

56 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

4.4.1

Chapter 4: Configuration

Paired

Paired

This tab lists all paired devices and their corresponding services. The format of the name is <Device

Name>:<Service Name>. Additional information may appear in this screen such as the Port Numbers for

Serial Profiles service.

To learn how to scan for devices to pair, review “Device” on page 58.

Note: If a service is actively paired and connected, the device and its services are displayed in bold typeface in this list.

• Tap on an item in the Paired tab to display an associated pop-up menu.

The displayed menu depends on the type of the service chosen.

Query Services and Remove Commands

• Query Services displays a Services dialog box where a pairing service is chosen.

• Remove unpairs the highlighted service and deletes the entry from the tab.

OBEX OPP (Object Exchange-Object Push Profile) Commands

The OPP defines two roles—a Push Server and a Push Client . Push Server is the device that provides an object exchange server. Push Client is the device that pushes and pulls objects to and from the Push Server .

OBEX OPP contains the following unique menu option:

• Send File displays an Open File dialog box where the file to be sent can be selected. When the transmission begins, another dialog box tracks the progress of the file transmission.

HSP/HFP (Headset Profile/Hands-Free Profile) Service Commands

The HSP (Headset Profile) allows users to connect their device to Bluetooth enabled headsets and other audio devices.

HSP/HFP services provide the following unique menu options:

• Connect Audio establishes an audio connection to the Bluetooth headset.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 57

Chapter 4: Configuration

Device

4.4.2

• Disconnect Audio disconnects the audio connection from the Bluetooth headset.

• Volume Control displays a dialog box where the headset and microphone volume can be adjusted.

Device

In this tab, users can discover and display Bluetooth devices.

4.4.2.1

Discovering and Removing Devices

Scan discovers Bluetooth devices in range of Omnii and lists them in this tab. Any existing devices previously discovered and listed will also be displayed.

Clear removes all Bluetooth devices listed except those with currently paired and connected services.

Note: To limit the number of devices listed to a particular type of device, refer to “Filtering By Class of Device (COD)”, next section.

4.4.2.2

Filtering By Class of Device (COD)

This menu allows you to filter the displayed devices by their COD. If, for example, you choose Computer from this menu, only the devices that have the matching Computer COD value will be displayed. Choosing

All lists all detected devices.

58 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration

Device

4.4.2.3

Device Pop-up Menu

The Device pop-up menu allows you to pair a device, update a device name or delete a device from the list.

Pair begins the pairing process by inquiring the services and profiles of the discovered device. An authentication dialog box is displayed the first time a Bluetooth device is paired.

Refresh Name repeats the device name inquiry, updating the name. This command is useful if a device is listed without a name (unknown), or if a device name has been changed remotely.

Delete removes this device from the list.

4.4.2.4

Pairing a Device

To pair devices:

• Follow the manufacturer’s instructions to place the remote device in pairing mode.

• Choose the Devices tab and Scan for devices in your area.

• When the scan is complete, tap on the device to which you want to pair.

• In the pop-up Device menu, tap on Pair .

An Authentication dialog box is displayed.

• If the remote device has authentication enabled, type the PIN in this dialog box.

• To proceed without authentication, tap on Next .

After entering the device PIN , the Services dialog appears with a list of services available for that device.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 59

Chapter 4: Configuration

Device

• Click in the checkbox to the left of the service to activate it.

• Click on Done .

Services that require more information present a configuration dialog box. Serial Profile is an example.

This dialog box offers a number of additional options such as enabling Encryption and selecting four different Modes : Serial , ActiveSync, Scanner , and Printer Port .

Serial is used for simple serial port communication.

ActiveSync is for ActiveSync-overBluetooth .

Scanner is used to create a connection to a barcode scanner. A serial connection is created, then the

Scanner Services is notified of the connection so that the incoming barcode scan will be forwarded to

Scanner Services directly.

Printer Port must be chosen here if you want to communicate with a paired Bluetooth printer. For further details, see “Mode” on page 61.

• Once you’ve completed the information, tap on Next and then in the Services screen, click on Done .

60 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration

Servers

4.4.3

Servers

4.4.4

When a remote Bluetooth device initiates a Bluetooth connection to Omnii, the remote device is considered the ‘ Bluetooth master’ and the hand-held, the ‘ Bluetooth slave’. In order for the remote device to connect to the hand-held, Omnii must offer a service in the form of a server. The Servers tab allows these services to be enabled and configured. There are three server services available: Serial , Scanner and OBEX OPP .

Serial server enables the Serial Port Profile server; a Serial Port can be selected from the drop-down menu.

You can assign either a BSP or a COM prefix from the drop-down menu. BSP ( Bluetooth Serial Port) was created by Microsoft to allow Bluetooth to have its own serial prefix in order to free up virtual COM prefixes as these are limited and are widely used.

Note: Even after a Serial Port Profile server is created, an application must open the created port before a remote device can connect.

Scanner server enables a Serial Port Profile server and then relays it to the Scanner Service (SCS). This is used for Bluetooth barcode scanners that operate in client mode. SCS opens the server port and handles the scanner input.

OBEX OPP server enables the Object Push Profile server. A warm reset must be performed on Omnii after a change is made to this option. The OPP Server allows other Bluetooth devices to send files to this device.

• Tap on the checkbox to activate the server.

Mode

Turn on Bluetooth activates the Bluetooth radio.

Discoverable determines whether Omnii is visible or invisible to other devices.

Printer Port allows you to assign and enable a virtual outgoing COM port selected from the drop-down menu to communicate with a paired Bluetooth printer. Keep in mind that when a port is chosen, the printer must be on and connected to the chosen port for a remote device to be able to connect.

• Select a port within the Printer Port drop-down list, e.g. BSP1:

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 61

Chapter 4: Configuration

About

4.4.5

• Check the Printer Port check box.

• Open the Device tab and tap on Scan .

• Tap-and-hold each Bluetooth Printer device entry and then select Pair , key-in the Passcode (if needed) and then tap Done . DO NOT select any services!

• Close the Bluetooth Manager.

• Select the Bluetooth device to print to—you will need to key-in (or programmatically raise) the following key sequence [CTRL] [ALT] [F1].

• You can now select the Bluetooth device to which you wish to print.

About

4.4.6

Device Name displays the broadcasted name of the hand-held. The name can be changed in the System

Properties applet: Start>Settings>Control Panel>System icon>Device Name tab .

Local Address displays the MAC address (BD_Addr) of the Bluetooth chip.

HCI Version & LMP Version display the version of the chip firmware.

Component indicates the version of the Psion Bluetooth Subsystem (the manager, drivers, etc).

Profiles lists the supported profiles on this specific Omnii.

The Bluetooth GPRS WAN Connection

The following steps describe how to set up an Internet data connection using a GSM cellular telephone with

Bluetooth. Omnii communicates via Bluetooth to the cell phone, which then accesses a WAN (Wide Area

Network) and transfers data using GPRS.

Enable the Dial-Up Networking service in the cell phone.

Make the phone discoverable .

Pair the phone service with the Omnii Dial-Up Networking service using the Bluetooth Manager .

(For instructions on pairing devices, refer to “Pairing a Device” on page 59.)

To set up the Internet parameters, choose the Network And Dial-up Connections icon from the

Control Panel .

Tap on Make New Connection .

62 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration

The Bluetooth GPRS WAN Connection

In the Make New Connection dialog box, choose Dial-Up Connection . Enter a name for your GPRS network connection.

Choose the Next button to display the Modem dialog box.

In the drop-down menu labelled Select a modem , choose the name of the modem with which you want to connect, and then choose the Configure button to display the Device Properties dialog box.

Omnii communicates via Bluetooth to your Bluetooth equipped cellular telephone and retrieves the parameters for the Device Properties dialog box. Omnii then disconnects.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 63

Chapter 4: Configuration

The Bluetooth GPRS WAN Connection

Under the Call Options tab, turn off Cancel the call if not connected within, and press [ENTER] to save your changes.

10. In the Modem dialog box, choose the Next button to display the Phone Number dialog box.

The phone number you enter is network carrier dependent. Once you’ve specified all the necessary information, choose the Finish button.

11.

In the Control Panel , choose the Dialing icon.

12. The values in the Dialing Properties dialog box need to be edited according to your network carrier specifications.

64 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration

Certificates

Once you’ve edited this dialog box to reflect your network carrier requirements, press [ENTER] to save your changes.

13.

At this point, return to the Control Panel, and choose the Network and Dial-up Connections icon.

14. In the network connection window, the new network configuration—in this case, New Connection is displayed. Tap on the new icon.

4.5

When you tap on your new connection, an onscreen message indicates the status of your connection: connected , disconnected , error messages , and so on.

Certificates

This program provides access to the Certificate Manager and Stores. The Certificate Manager displays the certificates in the Windows Certificate Store, and allows you to import, delete, and view these certificates.

Omnii checks that the certificate has been digitally signed by a certification authority that Omnii explicitly trusts. This option is used in conjunction with 802.1x authentication to enhance Omnii security.

• In the Control Panel , choose the Certificates icon.

Your Omnii has certificates preinstalled in the computer. My Certificates is the repository for the device’s personal certificate store, Other Authorities is the repository for the intermediate certificate store, and

Trusted Authorities is the repository for the Trusted Root certificate store.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 65

Chapter 4: Configuration

Data Transfer between Omnii and a PC

4.6

4.6.1

4.6.2

You can import or remove certificates, and view certificate information for any listing, including names, dates, serial numbers, etc.

For a detailed description about Certificate setup for both the server and client-side devices (Omnii Hand-

Held Computers), refer to the following website: http://www.microsoft.com/windowsserver2003/techinfo/overview/security.mspx

Data Transfer between Omnii and a PC

Data transfer options vary slightly depending on the type of operating system installed in your PC.

For Windows XP SP2 operating systems or earlier, Microsoft

ActiveSync

connectivity software can be used to connect your Omnii to PCs.

If the Windows Vista

, Windows 7 or later, operating system is installed in your PC, ActiveSync is not required to transfer data between your Omnii and your PC.

By using a Snap Module or Desktop Docking Station with your Omnii, you can connect to a PC with a cable and:

• View Omnii files from Windows Explorer.

• Drag and drop files between Omnii and the PC in the same way that you would between PC drives.

• Back up Omnii files to the PC, restore them from the PC to the hand-held again, etc.

Uploading Data in a Docking Station

The Desktop Docking Stations allow your hand-held to upload transaction data to a server computer when a radio link is not available. When Omnii is properly inserted in a docking station, a dock icon is displayed in the taskbar at the bottom of the unit screen. For detailed information, refer to “Desktop Docking Stations -

Models ST4002 and ST4003” on page 142.

Using Microsoft ActiveSync

Note: If you use a serial port to connect devices like Omnii to your desktop computer, the connection may not succeed because ActiveSync has trouble connecting at non-default baud rates.

To work around this problem, set the ActiveSync baud rate on the desktop to use the same baud rate as the device. You can set the baud rate by editing the registry on the desktop host computer, as detailed in the steps outlined at the following website: http://support.microsoft.com/kb/324466

To install ActiveSync, follow the step-by-step instructions provided with the program’s setup wizard. For details, go to the following website and type the name into the search box: http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/en/default.aspx

66 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration

Using Windows Mobile Device Center

4.6.3

4.7

Using Windows Mobile Device Center

If you are running Windows Vista , Windows 7, or later, your data transfers do not require ActiveSync.

Instead, you will need to download Windows Mobile Device Center . For instructions, go to the following website and type the name into the search box: http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/en/default.aspx

To transfer data between your PC and your hand-held:

• Tap on Start>Computer to display the drives. Omnii will be visible here.

• Open drives, files and folders as you would on your PC.

Display Properties

• In the Control Panel , choose the Display icon.

4.7.1

Background

• In the Display Properties dialog box, open the Background tab. This dialog box allows you to customize your background image.

4.7.2

Appearance

• In the Display Properties dialog box, open the Appearance tab. This dialog box allows you to customize the display colour scheme.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 67

Chapter 4: Configuration

Backlight

4.7.3

Backlight

The backlight is activated for a configurable amount of time. The Display Properties dialog box in the

Control Panel allows you to specify the intensity of the backlight along with how long the backlight remains on when the unit is not in use (no key press, scanner trigger, etc.).

Note: Keep in mind that this option may be restricted to supervisory use only.

• In the Display Properties dialog box, open the Backlight tab.

Note: Backlight changes take effect immediately. You do not need to reset the unit.

To maximize battery run time, keep the display backlight brightness and active durations as low as possible.

Intensity

This parameter is used to adjust the light intensity of the Omnii backlight. Sliding the bar to the left lowers the light intensity, and sliding it to the right raises the intensity.

Bright For

The value chosen from this drop-down menu determines the duration of time that the backlight stays on at the configured intensity after the last user action (keypress, scan trigger).

Dim For

The value chosen from this drop-down menu determines the duration of time that the backlight stays on at half the configured intensity (dimmed backlight) after expiration of the Bright For delay and as long as no user action takes place (such as a keypress or scan trigger). At the expiration of the Dim For duration, the display backlight shuts off.

External Power Checkbox

When you select the checkbox next to When using external power keep the backlight always ON , the backlight remains ON at the configured intensity when Omnii is operating with external power (not battery power). If Omnii is drawing power from its battery, this option is ignored and the other parameters defined in Display Properties dialog box take effect.

68 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

4.8 Dr. Debug

Dr. Debug is an error diagnostic and troubleshooting tool.

• Tap on Start>Settings > Control Panel . Tap on the Dr. Debug icon.

4.8.1

Status

Chapter 4: Configuration

Dr. Debug

4.8.2

This tab indicates the status (on/off) of the debug engines. Tapping on Browse logs displays error logs for your review. The logs should be used as reference when working with Psion Technical Support personnel.

Settings

• Choose an Error Level from the drop-down menu.

• To change the location where debug information will be stored, tap on the button to the right of the

Log Folder option.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 69

Chapter 4: Configuration

Utilities

4.8.3

Utilities

4.9

The Utilities tab is used to log network traffic. When you tap on the Start button, debug data is collected so that, if necessary, it can be forwarded to a Psion technician for evaluation.

Error Reporting

Error Reporting allows you to enable or disable Microsoft error reporting prompts.

• Tap on Start>Settings > Control Panel > Error Reporting icon to access your options.

4.10 GPS (Global Positioning System) Settings

This applet allows you to define how the GPS module operates. You can determine when the GPS module is powered and operating, and choose from a set of GPS profiles built into the modem. You can also set up the

AGPS Manager (an assisted GPS utility).

• Tap on Start>Settings>Control Panel>GPS Settings icon.

70 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration

Power

4.10.1

4.10.2

Power

This tab allows you to dictate how the GPS module behaves. The GPS Power drop-down menu is used to control when the GPS is powered on and off.

• Off – the GPS module is left off, always.

• Always on – the GPS module is powered on at all times regardless of the power state of the hand-held

(suspend).

• On, and off in suspend – the GPS module is powered on, but if Omnii is in suspend mode, the GPS module is turned off.

Profiles

4.10.3

Tapping on the GPS Profile Selection drop-down menu allows you to choose an appropriate profile: Default ,

Automotive or Pedestrian .

• Default profile is a good general profile suitable for most uses.

• Automotive profile is designed for in-vehicle use, providing quick location updates as the vehicle moves. When the GPS module is set to this profile and the vehicle enters an area such as a tunnel where satellite coverage is interrupted, it will attempt to predict the vehicle position.

• Pedestrian profile is designed for those using the GPS module while walking. It takes into account the slower pace of the pedestrian when mapping the location of the user. When the GPS module is set to this profile and the operator moves into an area where satellite coverage is interrupted, the GPS module will not attempt to predict the operator’s movement.

Programs

Tap on the GPS Program Port drop-down menu to choose the communication (COM) port that the GPS software will use to communicate with the GPS receiver.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 71

Chapter 4: Configuration

AGPS

4.10.4

AGPS

To determine your location, a GPS module receives data from three or more GPS satellites in fixed orbit around the Earth. The GPS module triangulates your location based on the time it takes for signals to get to and from the satellites. This works well in fairly clear areas, outdoors for example. However, if you’re attempting to triangulate your location in city centres where signals bounce off tall concrete buildings or from within a building, the GPS module will have greater difficulty calculating a fix.

AGPS reduces Time To First Fix (TTFF) and increases the likelihood of finding and keeping a fix in poor coverage areas such as indoor sites. AGPS downloads satellite ephemeris (orbital) data to Omnii periodically through Wi-Fi or WWAN. The downloaded data is used by the GPS module to speed the process of getting a fix.

Update

• Click on the Update button to download Extended Ephemeris (EE) files from a secure host on the Internet using any interface that has an Internet connection. These files contain several days worth of ephemeris (orbital) data that can be used if the satellite’s broadcast ephemeris is not available.

The Status field above the Update button displays the progress of the download, and once successfully downloaded, the Status field will read Idle .

Settings

• Click on the Settings button to define the AGPS server connection settings .

The AGPS server connection settings drop-down menu allows you to choose from two settings: Use default settings and Use custom settings .

The Use default settings option is generally acceptable for most applications. Note that aside from the

Update field in which you can choose how long the fix is stored in your Omnii, the field values cannot be edited.

The Use custom settings option is generally used to configure devices that will have access only to an intranet rather than the Internet and should only be altered with the assistance of qualified Psion personnel.

They will be able to help you configure your Psion devices and web server to retrieve the ephemeris data.

72 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration

Info

4.10.5

Info

4.11

This tab provides general information about the GPS module such as the firmware version, the date on which files were last updated, and so on. If GPS module support service is required, you may be asked to tap on the Save button in this tab and forward the information to Psion support staff.

Imager & Camera Settings

The Imagers applet is used to create, modify, delete, and activate imager and camera settings. The principle uses of the applet are to decode barcodes and to capture images. A Demonstration Application is provided to demonstrate how the imager works. Refer to “Demo” on page 38 for details.

Refer to Appendix C: “Imager & Camera Settings” for configuration details.

To launch this applet:

• In the Control Panel , choose the Imagers icon.

Note: This icon is only displayed when the appropriate imager is installed in your Omnii. If there is an imager installed but this icon is not present, additional software (ICS) may need to be installed.

To enable a newly-installed imager, Press and hold down the [FN] key and the

[ENTER/Power] key simultaneously for a minimum of three seconds.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 73

Chapter 4: Configuration

Input Panel

4.12 Input Panel

Omnii is equipped with a Soft Input Panel (SIP). Shown below is the standard Microsoft SIP, accessed from the Control Panel.

Soft Keyboard

Input Panel

Button Icon

Tapping on the Input Panel button displays a soft input panel (soft keyboard) that can be customized using the Input Panel dialog box.

Important: If the Input Panel button icon is not visible in the taskbar, from the ‘Start’ menu, tap on Settings>Taskbar and Start Menu. Tap the checkbox next to ‘Show Input

Panel Button’. To remove this icon from the taskbar, tap in the checkbox to erase the check mark.

The soft keyboard operates just like a standard keyboard except that rather than pressing a key, you tap on letters, numbers, modifier keys, etc. on the Omnii screen.

To customize the appearance and behaviour of the soft keyboard:

Tap on the Input Panel icon in the Control Panel .

Figure 4.2 Input Panel Properties

• Tap on the Options button to change the appearance of your soft keyboard.

74 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration

Keyboard Properties

Note: You can also display this dialog box by double-tapping on the Input icon in the far-right corner of the taskbar.

Figure 4.3 Soft Keyboard Options

4.12.1

Keyboard Properties

This icon displays the Keyboard Properties dialog box in which you can adjust the repeat rate of the keys, the intensity of the keyboard backlight and the behaviour of the [FN] and [SYM] modifier keys. This dialog box also allows you to define macro keys and Unicode characters.

• In the Control Panel , choose the Keyboard icon.

4.12.1.1

Key Repeat

Note: These settings apply when a key is held down continuously.

• In the Keyboard Properties dialog box, open the Repeat tab.

Repeat Delay

The value assigned for this parameter determines the delay in milliseconds between repeat characters.

Sliding the Repeat Delay bar to the left increases the delay between key repeats, and sliding the bar to the right shortens the repeat delay time.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 75

Chapter 4: Configuration

Keyboard Properties

Repeat Rate

The value assigned for the Repeat Rate parameter determines how quickly the key you press repeats and is measured in characters per second (cps). Sliding the bar to the left slows the repeat rate, and sliding the bar to the right increases the repeat rate.

Note: Use the field at the bottom of this dialog box to test the repeat delay and rate settings you’ve chosen.

4.12.1.2

Keyboard Backlight

• In the Keyboard Properties dialog box, open the Backlight tab.

Intensity

This parameter is used to adjust the light intensity of the Omnii keyboard backlight. Sliding the bar to the left darkens the keyboard backlight intensity, and sliding it to the right lightens the intensity.

Note: The keypad backlight maximum brightness will decrease over time as it ages. Use mid-range intensity settings when possible to extend the backlight lifespan. When the backlight starts to dim, use this parameter to make it brighter.

ON For

The value chosen from this drop-down menu determines the duration of time that the keyboard backlight stays on after the last user action (keypress or scan trigger).

Note: Tapping in the checkbox next to ‘When using external power, keep the backlight always

ON’ forces the keypad backlight to remain on when the unit is operating with external power.

4.12.1.3

Keyboard One Shot Modes

• In the Keyboard Properties dialog box, open the One Shots tab.

76 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration

Keyboard Properties

The options in this tab allow you to determine how modifier keys on your Omnii behave. For each modifier key—[ALT], [SHIFT], [CTRL], [FN], and [SYM]—you have the following options in the drop-down menu: Lock ,

OneShot , and OneShot/Lock .

Note: Keep in mind that checking the taskbar lets you know whether or not these keys are locked on. For example, if the [FN] key is locked ‘on’, the taskbar at the bottom of the screen displays it underlined. If this key is displayed without the underline in the taskbar, you’ll know that the key is not locked. It will become inactive following a key press.

Important: Once you’ve assigned a One Shot mode to a modifier key, you need to tap on the

OK button at the top of the tab to activate your selection.

Lock

If you choose Lock from the drop-down menu, pressing a modifier key once locks it ‘on’ until you press the modifier key a second time to unlock or turn it off.

OneShot

If you choose OneShot , the modifier key remains active only until the next key is pressed.

OneShot/Lock

OneShot/Lock allows you to combine these functions. When you choose this option and you press the modifier key once, it remains active only until the next key is pressed.

If you press the modifier key twice, it is locked ‘on’, remaining active until the modifier key is pressed a third time to turn it ‘off’.

4.12.1.4

Keyboard Macro Keys

• In the Keyboard Properties dialog box, open the Macros tab.

A macro has 200 programmable characters (or “positions”). The macro keys can be programmed to replace frequently used keystrokes, along with the function of executable keys including [ENTER], [BACKSPACE] and [DEL] ([FN]-[BACKSPACE]), function keys and arrow keys.

Recording and Saving a Macro

You can program up to 6 physical macro keys, depending on your keyboard layout. You can also increase the number of virtual macro keys up to 15 using Scancode Remapping (for details, see “Scancode Remapping” on page 79).

• In the Macro menu highlight a macro key number, for example macro 1, to assign a macro to macro key

[M1]. Choose the Record button.

A message screen is displayed instructing you to Enter Key Strokes to Record .

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 77

Chapter 4: Configuration

Keyboard Properties

• Type the macro sequence you want to assign to the Macro key. You can type text and numbers, and you can program the function of special keys into a macro.

• When you’ve finished recording your macro sequence, press the key sequence: [CTRL] [ALT] [ENTER], or choose the Stop Recording button.

A new screen ‘Verify Macro’ displays the macro sequence you created. The Save button is highlighted.

• Press [ENTER] to save your macro, or highlight CANCEL and press [ENTER] to discard it.

Executing a Macro

To execute a macro:

• Press the macro key to which you’ve assigned the macro.

Deleting a Macro

To delete a macro:

• In the Macros tab, highlight the macro number you want to delete.

• Choose the Delete button.

4.12.1.5

Unicode Mapping

• In the Keyboard Properties dialog box, open the Unicode Mapping tab.

The Unicode Mapping tab is used to map combinations of virtual key values and [CTRL] and [SHIFT] states to Unicode™ values. This tab shows the configured Unicode character along with the Unicode value. For ex-

78 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration

Keyboard Properties ample, the sample screen above shows “a (U+0061)” indicating that the character “a” is represented by the

Unicode value “0061”, and so on. Keep in mind that Unicode configurations are represented as hexadecimal rather than decimal values.

All user-defined Unicode mappings are listed in the Unicode Mapping tab in order of virtual key value, and then by order of the shift state. If a Unicode mapping is not listed, the Unicode mapping is mapped to the default Unicode value.

Adding and Changing Unicode Values

Important: Changes to Unicode mappings are not saved until you exit the Keyboard Properties dialog box.

• Choose the Add/Change button.

• Highlight a value in the Unicode mapping list. In the sample screen above, a value will be assigned to virtual key 0 (VK 0).

• Position the cursor in the Unicode Mapping field, and type a Unicode value for the highlighted key.

Note: To add a shifted state, [SHIFT] and/or [CTRL], press [TAB] to position the cursor in the checkbox next to ‘SHIFT Pressed’ and/or ‘CTRL Pressed’. Press [SPACE] to select the shift state you want to assign.

Removing Unicode Values

• In the Unicode Mapping tab, highlight the item you want to delete, and choose the Remove button.

4.12.1.6

Scancode Remapping

A scancode is a number that is associated with a physical key on a keyboard. Every key has a unique scancode that is mapped to a virtual key, a function or a macro. Scancode Remapping allows you to change the functionality of any key on the keyboard. A key can be remapped to send a virtual key (e.g. VK_F represents the ‘F’ key; VK_RETURN represents the [ENTER/Power] key, etc.), perform a function (e.g. turn the scanner on, change volume, etc.) or run a macro.

There are three different tables of scancode mappings: the Normal table, the FN table and the SYM table.

Note: When using the Mobile Devices SDK Developers' Guide (PN 8100016), note that the

[ORANGE] key is interchangeable with the [SYM] key. Similarly, in the context of the scancode mapping tables, ‘Orange’ is interchangeable with ‘SYM’.

The Normal table defines unmodified key presses; the FN table defines key presses that occur when the

[FN] modifier is on; the SYM table defines key presses that occur when the [SYM] modifier is on. The default

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 79

Chapter 4: Configuration

Keyboard Properties mappings of these scancodes can be overwritten for each of these three tables using the Scancode Remapping tab accessed from the Keyboard Properties dialog box.

The first column in the Scancode Remapping tab displays the scancodes in hexadecimal. If the scancode is remapped to a virtual key, that virtual key is displayed in the next column labelled ‘V-Key’. A virtual key that is ‘Shifted’ or ‘Unshifted’ is displayed in the third column labelled ‘Function’.

If the scancode is remapped to a function or a macro, the first and second columns remain blank while the third column contains the function name or macro key number (e.g., Macro 2).

Adding a Remap

To add a new remapping:

• Choose the Add button at the bottom of the dialog box.

The Remap Scancode dialog box is displayed.

• Type the scan code in hexadecimal in the field labelled Scancode .

Note: The Label field displays the default function of the scancode you are remapping.

Virtual Key, Function and Macro

The radio buttons at the bottom of the dialog box allow you to define to what the scan code will be remapped: Virtual Key, Function or Macro.

When Virtual Key is selected, you can choose to force [SHIFT] to be on or off when the virtual key is sent. If

No Force is selected, the shift state is dependent on whether the shift state is on or off at the time the virtual key is sent.

80 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration

Keyboard Properties

When Function is selected, a list of valid functions appears in the dialog box.

When Macro is selected, the macro keys available on your unit are listed in the dialog box.

• Choose Virtual Key , Function or Macro .

• Choose a function from the Function list in the dialog box, and tap on OK .

Editing a Scancode Remap

To edit a scancode:

• In the Scancode Remapping tab, tap on the remap you want to edit.

• Tap on the Edit button, and make the appropriate changes.

• Tap on OK to save your changes.

Removing a Remap

To delete a remap:

• In the Scancode Remapping tab, highlight the scancode you want to delete, and tap on the Remove button.

• Tap on OK .

4.12.1.7

Lock Sequence

The Lock Sequence menu allows you to lock the Omnii keyboard to prevent keys from being pressed accidentally when, for example, the unit is inserted in a holster.

• To lock the keyboard, tap in the checkbox next to Enable key lock sequence .

• Tap in the checkbox next to Keyboard locked at startup .

• In the Key sequence drop-down menu, choose the key sequence you will need to type to unlock the keyboard.

Note: It is useful to leave the ‘Show popup message’ enabled (default) so that anyone attempting to use the keyboard will see the key sequence they will need to enter to unlock the keyboard displayed on the screen.

A locked keyboard icon is displayed in the softkey bar when the keyboard is locked.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 81

Chapter 4: Configuration

Manage Triggers

Locked Keyboard

Icon

4.13

• Type the key sequence to unlock the keyboard.

Manage Triggers

Allows users to configure how barcode scanners and other devices such as RFID readers are triggered. You can configure the trigger ID for each trigger button for both single- and double-click, and the double-click time.

• In the Control Panel , choose the Manage Triggers icon.

• In the Manage Triggers screen you’ll see a list of trigger mappings.

4.13.1

Trigger Mappings

A trigger mapping is an association between a particular key on the keyboard and a driver or application, the module(s)—sometimes referred to as “trigger consumer(s)”—of the trigger source. Along with keyboard keys, the external trigger (scan button) is software-based. When the specified key is pressed, the owner (for example, a decoded scanner) is sent a message.

82 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration

Add and Edit Trigger Mapping

4.13.2

Important: It is not possible to have two or more identical mappings—for example [F1] cannot be mapped to the Non-Decoded Scanner twice—even if the trigger type is different.

A keyboard key that is used as a trigger source will no longer generate key data, or perform its normal function. For example, if the space button is used as a trigger source, it will not be able to send space characters to applications.

Double-Click

When a key is pressed and released, then pressed again within the configured time (between 0 to

1000 msec), a double-click occurs. See also “Trigger-Press Type” on page 84.

Show All Modules

By default, the trigger mapping list only shows active mappings. Mappings for drivers or applications that are not currently active are not normally displayed. By checking this checkbox, all mappings, both active and inactive, are displayed.

Add

Tapping this button brings up the Add Mapping dialog (see page 83), so that you can add new trigger mappings.

Edit

Tapping this button brings up the Edit Mapping dialog (see page 83), so that you can edit existing trigger mappings.

Remove

Tapping this button removes an existing mapping.

The OK button in the top right of the Manage Triggers screen saves all changes made. If the cancel button X is tapped instead, or the [ESC] key is pressed, all changes made will be discarded.

Add and Edit Trigger Mapping

These dialogs allow you to add and edit trigger mappings.

Trigger Key

This drop-down list allows you to specify the source of the trigger events, such as the Soft Scan , Left Scan , etc., for the trigger module selected.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 83

Chapter 4: Configuration

Microphone

Note: It is possible to map the same source to different modules (trigger consumers)—for example, to both the Imager and Non-Decoded Scanner. If so, both devices/operations will occur simultaneously. This is not recommended in most cases, especially with devices such as

Imagers or RFID Readers.

It is also possible to map different sources to the same module (trigger consumer)—for example, two different trigger keys can be mapped to the RFID File System.

Add Key

Only existing trigger sources are shown in the Source combo-box. To add a new source to this list, tap on the Add Key button. A dialog will pop up and allow you to select the keyboard key to use as a trigger source.

Trigger-Press Type

You can enable either an Up/Down or Double Click response to a trigger press. Normally, when a trigger

(keyboard key, etc.) is pressed and released, a “trigger down” event is sent to the “owner”—that is, the application receiving the trigger press information—followed by a “trigger up”. If Double Click is chosen in this menu, when the trigger is pressed, released, and then pressed again, a “double-click” event will have occurred. If a mapping with the type Up/Down has also been configured for the same source, it will only receive the first set of trigger events.

Module Trigger

This identifies the driver or application receiving the trigger presses.

Show All Modules

By default, inactive owners are not shown. By checking this checkbox, all owners, both active and inactive, are displayed.

4.14 Microphone

• In the Control Panel , choose the Microphone icon. Use this dialog box to adjust the gain for the specific microphones associated with your hand-held.

84 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

4.15

4.16

Chapter 4: Configuration

Open TekTerm

• Tap on the drop-down menu, and choose the microphone for which you want to adjust the gain.

• Slide the microphone tab to the left to decrease the gain and to the right to increase the gain.

Tapping on the Default button sets the current microphone you’ve chosen to the default gain. Tapping on

Default All sets all microphones listed to their default gain.

Open TekTerm

Open TekTerm is a powerful emulation application ideally suited for real time data transaction applications associated with mainframes and servers. Omnii includes unique features that support Open TekTerm, a

Psion application that has the ability to maintain multiple simultaneous sessions with a variety of host computers. For detailed information, please refer to the Open TekTerm Software User Manual , PN 8000073.

PartnerUp

This app displays a number of pre-loaded applications. Tapping on an app in the list takes you to an associated web site.

The operator can then install the application. If a license is required, it can be obtained by sending an e-mail to the software license mailbox or by contacting a Sales Representative from the Psion contact web page.

www.psion.com/us/about/contact_psion-offices.htm

Additional pieces of software such as a server must be obtained through Psion.

Tapping on a preloaded client in this screen displays a drop-down menu from which the operator can choose from an array of related options. In the example following, Stay-Linked Documentation was chosen.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 85

Chapter 4: Configuration

Pocket PC Compatibility

4.17 Pocket PC Compatibility

Omnii supports the AYGShell API set that allows Pocket PC-compatible applications to run on the handheld. Windows Embedded CE includes application programming interface (API) compatibility support for the Microsoft Windows Powered Pocket PC 2002 shell in units running Windows Embedded CE.

The website listed below describes the APIs exposed through AYGShell and the application compatibility between Windows Powered Pocket PC 2002-based applications and Windows Embedded CE based devices: http://msdn.microsoft.com/library/default.asp?url=/library/enus/dncenet/html/WINCENET_CEPCC_App.asp

4.18 Power Properties

This icon displays a Power Properties dialog box that indicates the unit’s battery capacity and allows you to manage battery use.

• In the Control Panel , choose the Power icon.

4.18.1

Battery Capacity

• In the Power Properties dialog box, open the Battery tab to view battery details.

4.18.2

Power Saving Suspend

• In the Power Properties dialog box, open the Suspend tab.

Power Source

This drop-down menu allows you to specify whether the unit is using AC Power or Battery Power .

86 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration

Suspend Threshold and Estimated Battery Backup

4.18.3

Suspend Timeout

Important: Psion recommends setting the Suspend value to 3 minutes. To further reduce power consumption, carefully consider the duration of time that the display backlight is ‘on’ (see “Backlight” on page 68 ).

When Omnii is idle—not receiving any user input (a key touch, a scan, and so on) or system activity (serial data, an activity initiated by an application, and so on)—the hand-held uses the value assigned in the

Suspend Timeout field to determine when the unit will go to sleep (appear to be off).

When the time in the Suspend Timeout field elapses without any activity, the unit enters suspend state. In suspend state, the Omnii CPU enters a sleep state, and wireless communication is shut off. The state of the device (RAM contents) is preserved. Pressing [ENTER] wakes the system from suspend state.

Suspend Threshold and Estimated Battery Backup

The Suspend Threshold adjustment tells the system when to shut down when the battery drains. If you choose Maximum Operating Time , the unit will run until the battery is completely empty; the RAM is only backed up for a short period of time. If you choose Maximum Backup Time , the hand-held shuts off with more energy left in the battery so RAM can be backed up for a longer period of time.

Important: Selecting Maximum backup time will reserve approximately 20% of the battery capacity for memory backup. Once the battery is drained, the system RAM memory is lost and the unit must cold boot.

In most real-time transaction environments this is not a problem (it only takes a few seconds to cold boot). Batch transaction environments, where data is not saved to a non-volatile memory (such as an SD FLASH card), may need to pay particular attention to this parameter. Psion does not recommend the storage of any valuable data in system RAM.

The Omnii Windows Embedded CE 6.0 environment does not store any critical data in RAM (such as the registry or file system).

If your application does not save data to RAM, Psion recommends keeping the

Suspend Threshold setting as low as possible to maximize battery run time.

The Estimated Battery Backup is the amount of battery power that has been reserved or set aside to protect data until a charged battery can be installed in the hand-held. When the battery capacity is depleted up to the Estimated Battery Backup reserve specified in the Suspend Threshold menu, Omnii shuts off automatically and uses the reserve power to preserve the data stored on the computer. Once Omnii shuts down, it cannot be switched on until a fresh battery is installed, or the unit is inserted in a docking station or cradle.

• Slide the Suspend Threshold button to the right to increase the battery capacity reserved for backup purposes. Data will be preserved to a maximum of 124 hours.

• Slide the Suspend Threshold button to the left to decrease the power reserved for backup purposes; this increases the Omnii operating time—the amount of time the unit will operate before shutting down—but reduces the power reserved for backup purposes to a minimum of 24 hours.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 87

Chapter 4: Configuration

Advanced

Internal super-capacitors will protect the data stored in the computer while the battery is swapped for a fully charged one.

Important: Once the battery is removed, the super-capacitors will preserve the data stored on

Omnii for approximately 4 minutes. It is critical that you install a charged battery before this time elapses.

4.18.4

Advanced

• In the Power Properties dialog box, open the Advanced tab.

4.18.5

Allow Suspend With

This menu allows you to specify whether or not your unit will enter Suspend Mode while it is operating with an active PPP connection, network interface or active TCP/IP connection.

Low Power Warnings

The sliding scale at the bottom of this menu allows you to specify the remaining battery capacity at which a warning message is displayed on the Omnii screen, from 0% to 20%.

Built-in Devices

• In the Power Properties dialog box, open the Built-in Devices tab.

4.18.6

WWAN Power Mode

This menu allows you to enable power to your WWAN radio, and whether or not the radio will turn off when

Omnii enters Suspend Mode. To configure the radio, please refer to Appendix F: “Wireless Wide Area

Network (WWAN) Settings”.

Battery Health

The Battery Health service provides an estimate of battery health based on a number of different measurements, beyond just capacity.

88 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration

Battery Health

Important: Battery Health is an estimate and should not be depended on to provide a 100% account of battery condition.

• In the Power Properties dialog box, open the Battery Health tab.

Current Battery Health Meter

The Current Battery Health Meter default values are shown here as ***** (Excellent), *** (Used), and *

(Battery should be replaced). If you tap on the battery icon in the taskbar, a pop-up screen will show the state of the battery. The image below shows the default Excellent status screen.

Enable Battery Health Service

This option allows you to enable the service. To access the menus after enabling the service, you will need to either wait until a resume from Suspend or restart Omnii.

Wakeup Device on Battery Insert

When this option is enabled, whenever the battery is replaced Omnii is powered up from Suspend and the current health of the battery is displayed.

Add Health Colour to the Taskbar Battery Tray Icon

Enabling this option changes the background colour for the battery icon in the Taskbar, based on battery condition: Green (excellent), Yellow (used), and Red (battery should be replaced).

Show Popup UI on Device-Resume

You can decide when the battery status pop-up user interface (UI) will appear, for how many seconds, and whether the battery cycle count is displayed ( off by default).

Edit – Changing Ratings Text

You can customize the ratings text with the Edit option. By enclosing your text within the html tag used for

Bold <b> (or removing the tag to unbold the text), you can change the text that will appear in the pop-up battery status screen. For example, the default text “ Excellent ” can be changed to: “Battery is excellent, and will last one day shift.”...

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 89

Chapter 4: Configuration

PsionVU Access

4.19 PsionVU Access

PsionVU Access enables you to customize your computer settings, remove or add shortcuts to the desktop and Control Panel, and limit access to various different components on the computer and the system tray icons for security.

Note: The Desktop theme can be changed from the default Windows Classic Shell to the PsionVU

Shell either in the PsionVU Access settings (see “Other Shell Themes” on page 93) or by tapping on the Desktop icon PsionVU Shell (see “The PsionVU Desktop Shell” on page 42).

• In the Control Panel , choose the PsionVU icon.

When opening the PsionVU application, the PsionVU Access dialog will come up that enables you to either proceed to the PsionVU Settings menus, or change from you current Access mode to the other (Administrator or User). The computer must be reset following a change, and a confirmation will appear to enable you to continue or dismiss the change.

When opening the PsionVu Settings option, the following menus will be available:

90 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration

Administrator Password

Figure 4.4 PsionVU Settings

4.19.1

Administrator Password

By setting an Administrator Password, you can limit access to various different components on the computer and the system tray icons for security. The default security setting allows User access to all options, therefore restrictions and settings can be configured without setting a password.

Note: If a setting or restriction is configured without setting an Administrator password, the following message is displayed: “!Administrator password is currently not set.” Once a password has been set, the message will disappear.

When an administrator password is set, the restricted options are accessed using a key combination. If a password has been set, the user would be prompted for the password.

The option Show Password changes the displayed password from hidden (***) to readable.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 91

Chapter 4: Configuration

Shell Settings

4.19.2

Shell Settings

The Shell Settings application has two menus: Applications and Advanced .

Applications

The Applications menu lists all the applications installed on the computer, alphabetically. The items checked in this view are shown on the Desktop.

The Add and Edit buttons allow you to search for and add an application to the list of items in the selection window. You can add a maximum of 18 applications, after which the Add option will be greyed out and the following message is displayed: “!Maximum 18 entries reached.”

When you select an application and tap on Edit, you will see fields for Command, Parameters , and Display

Name .

• Command: The Command field is prefilled with the path and name of the executable ( .exe

) or corresponding link ( .lnk

). If the selected file can’t be found (e.g. external memory card has been removed, files have been deleted), a message will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: “These files cannot be found.”

• Parameters: The Parameters option provides the option of adding extra parameters to the application (for .exe

files only, not .lnk

). For example, if the Command field is running “pword.exe”

(Microsoft WordPad), the Parameters field could specify a document to open.

• Display name: This is an editable field which is prefilled with the name of the application.

Advanced

The Applications menu allows you to enable or disable some device functions.

Windows Classic Shell

The following options can be enabled or disabled in the Windows Classic Shell Desktop theme:

• Start Menu Bar : If disabled, access to both Start Menu and Notifications are disabled. The Notification tooltips will still display. Any changes made will occur after a device reset.

92 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration

Restrictions

• Start Button: If disabled, access to the Start Button and Notifications are disabled. The Notification tooltips will still display.

Note: If “Disable access to the Start Button” is selected, but the “PsionVU Access by Key Sequence” remains unchecked, you will see the following status-message “!A Key Sequence is required when the Start Button is disabled.”, the checkbox will be auto-checked, and the focus will be set to the key-sequence selection.

• Notifications: If disabled, the Notifications tooltips will still display.

• PsionVU Access in Start Menu: When this box is checked, the PsionVU Access program will be shown in the Start Menu>Programs list.

The following item is not optional:

• PsionVU Access Key Sequence: Sets the key sequence to open PsionVU Access .

Other Shell Themes

4.19.3

The following options can be enabled or disabled in the PsionVU Shell Desktop themes (shown in the dropdown list as Ingenuity , Active_Glow , Clear_Run , and Flip_Side_Blue ):

Note: The Desktop theme can be changed from the default Windows Classic Shell to one of the

PsionVU themes shown here—but by tapping on the Desktop icon PsionVU Shell (see “The

PsionVU Desktop Shell” on page 42), the “Ingenuity” theme is automatically loaded. The computer must be reset in order for the shell to change.

• Use this picture as the background: You can select a picture as the Desktop background.

• Notifications: If disabled, the Notifications tooltips will still display.

• Launch an application Startup: A window is displayed listing all of the installed and added applications. Any applications selected will startup after a reboot.

The following item is not optional:

• PsionVU Access Key Sequence: Sets the key sequence to open PsionVU Access .

Restrictions

This section deals with items that are by default available to users but can be restricted by an administrator.

Advanced

The Advanced menu lists the system features you can restrict or block.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 93

Chapter 4: Configuration

Control Panel Settings

Notifications

The Notifications menu allows you to block or disable notifications.

4.19.4

Control Panel Settings

In these menus you can set which applets and tabs you want to Hide in Control Panel, and which applets and tabs will be Accessible as a shortcut icon from the Desktop.

• You have the option of setting the entire applet or specific tabs within the applet as hidden or accessible. Any applet that can’t be set is greyed out.

4.19.5

• You can add a maximum of 18 applications, after which the following message is displayed: “!Maximum

18 entries reached.”

Import/Export to File

This option enables you to Export your settings file ( .xml

), and save it in the location of your choice. In addition, an Administrator has the option to Import these settings from one device to multiple devices of the same operating system .

94 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration

Remote Desktop Connection

Important: A copy of this file should also be saved in a central repository for all Psion .xml files with a predefined name so that other Psion utilities can locate it.

Tapping on the Export button will display a “Save As” Export Settings dialog, with the default name

PsionVU_Settings.xml

, which the Administrator can change even after it has been saved.

The .xml

file contains all of the PsionVU configured settings, including the Administrator Password . When the file is imported to a device, the new password is applied immediately.

• Whether choosing to import or export files, the same file location options under My Device will be listed. Following the action, a message stating the success of the operation and the location of the file will be displayed.

• With the exception of the password, changes made to settings will take effect only after a warm reset.

If further changes to the configuration are made, they will overwrite the changes caused by the import operation. After importing a file, a dialog will appear to enable you to reset now or later.

4.20 Remote Desktop Connection

Remote Desktop Connection, located in Start>Programs , is an Omnii application used to connect to a

Windows Terminal Server so that you can run a “session” on the Server machine, using Omnii (Windows

Embedded CE device).

Refer to the following website for step-by-step information about setting up this connection: http://www.microsoft.com/windowsxp/using/mobility/getstarted/remoteintro.mspx

or contact Psion support services.

Locate the office closest to you at: www.psion.com/service-and-support.htm

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 95

Chapter 4: Configuration

Scanners

4.21 Scanners

The Scanners icon in the Control Panel provides dialog boxes in which you can tailor barcode scanner configuration and choose the barcodes your scanner will recognize. The parameters are preset with the default settings of the decoded scanner installed in the unit.

Important: To enable a newly-installed scanner, press and hold down the [FN] key and the

[ENTER/Power] key simultaneously for a minimum of three seconds.

4.21.1

You can test the scanner to ensure that it is operating properly by pointing the scanner window at a barcode that your scanner was designed to decode —for example, a 1D UPC barcode or 2D barcode. Press the SCAN key or pistol trigger, and check for a valid decode on the hand-held’s screen.

For a listing of available scanners and their specifications, please refer to Chapter B: “Omnii Specifications”.

Barcodes

4.21.1.1

Scanner

The drop-down menu to the right of the Scanner option allows you to choose configurations for one of the following scanner types, depending on what is installed in/on your hand-held: Decoded (internal), Decoded

(Intermec ISCP), Imager and Non-decoded .

The symbologies listed in the Barcodes tab change to reflect the scanner you choose and the barcodes it supports. Always defer to your barcode scanner’s programming manual when in doubt about the availability or settings for any parameter.

Note: Your Omnii comes preconfigured from the factory for internal scanner types. The type of scanner installed can be determined from the System icon in the Control Panel, under the

System Properties tab.

Important: To improve the decode speed and performance, enable (set to ‘on’) only those codes that are required by the application.

For information on configuring the barcode symbologies, see Appendix D: “Scanner Settings”.

Keep in mind that some barcode types are only available when an internal imaging scanner is installed. All internal scanners can be configured using these dialog boxes.

96 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration

Options

4.21.1.2

Restoring Default Settings

If you want to restore the factory defaults after making changes, the defaults can be applied to a selected parameter, sub-tree of parameters or all scanner parameters.

• Press and hold on a symbology (e.g., Code 128) to display a pop-up menu.

• Choose Default subtree to reset only the parameters in the symbology you selected, or choose

Default all settings to reset all scanner parameters to default settings.

To reset a single parameter to its default setting:

• Press and hold on the parameter you want to reset.

4.21.2

• Choose Default parameter to reset the parameter to the default setting.

Options

This tab allows you to tailor the double-click parameters, display, and data handling options associated with your scanner.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 97

Chapter 4: Configuration

Options

4.21.2.1

Double Click Parameters

Click Time (msec)

This parameter controls the maximum gap time (in milliseconds) for a double-click. If the time between the first and second clicks of the scanner trigger is within this time, it is considered a double-click. The allowable range is 0 to 1000. A value of zero disables this feature.

A double-click produces different results depending on whether or not a value is assigned in the “Click

Data” parameter. When a value is not assigned for the “Click Data”, double-clicking the scanner trigger overrides the target dot delay set in the “Dot Time” parameter and initiates a normal scan sweep. If a value is assigned for the “Click Data” parameter, double-clicking the scanner trigger inserts the “Click Data” value rather than initiating a scan.

Click Data

This parameter determines which character is sent to the application installed in your Omnii following a double-click. A dialog box appears, asking that you press the key you want to insert. The ASCII/Unicode key value of the keypress is displayed.

Pressing the [ESC] key in this dialog box resets the data to zero.

4.21.2.2 Display Parameters

Scan Result

When this parameter is enabled, the type of barcode and the result of the scan appear on the screen. Note that this information is only displayed after a successful decode and is visible only while the scanner trigger is pressed. When the trigger is released, this information is cleared from the screen.

Scan Indicator

When this parameter is enabled, the laser warning logo appears on the display whenever the scanner is activated.

Scan Result Time (sec)

The value assigned to the Scan Result Time parameter determines how long the scan results of a successful scan are displayed on the screen. Time is measured in seconds, and a value of 0 (zero) disables the parameter. When you choose this option, a dialog box appears where you can enter a value.

Note: To remove the scan result from the screen before the “Result Time” has expired, point the scanner away from the barcode and press the trigger.

Good Scan Beep and Bad Scan Beep

These parameters determine whether or not Omnii emits an audible scanner ‘beep’ when a good (successful) scan or a bad (unsuccessful) scan is performed. Set these parameters to either on to enable the beeper or off to disable it.

Multiple Beep Tones

You can set the audible scanner ‘beep’ to emit a series of three beeps instead of one. Set this parameter to on to enable the multiple beep tones.

98 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Good Scan Vibrates and Bad Scan Vibrates

Chapter 4: Configuration

Translations

These parameters determine whether or not Omnii creates a vibration when a good (successful) scan or a bad (unsuccessful) scan is performed. Set these parameters to on to enable the vibration. You can set the

Number and Duration of vibrations, as well as the Pause between vibrations. The screen above shows the default settings.

Soft Scan Timeout

This parameter is used by the SDK “Scan” function (soft-scan: starting a scan session via the SDK function, instead of a physical user trigger press). The value assigned to this parameter determines the soft-scan timeout from 1 to 10 sec (default is 3 sec ).

Scan Log File

If this parameter is enabled, the input barcode and the modified/translated output barcode are logged in the file \Flash Disk\ScanLog.txt

. Keep in mind that if Scan Log File is enabled, there is a slight performance reduction when performing multiple scans since the log file is written to persistent storage.

4.21.2.3 Data Handling

Codepage

If you are encountering a scan failure because there is an unrecognized language character in the barcode, the Codepage option may correct the problem by allowing the ISO-8859-1 Latin 1 codepage to be used. The default value is Default Local ASCII .

4.21.3

Important: Do not change this parameter from the default setting unless you are certain that it will correct your scan problem.

Translations

The Translations menu allows you to define up to 10 cases, each consisting of up to 10 rules in sequential order. Only one case will be applied to a barcode and a case will only be applied if all rules specified in the case are successful—if a rule within a case fails, the entire case fails.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 99

Chapter 4: Configuration

Translations

• In the Translation menu, tap on the Case # to create rules.

• Tap on the No rule drop-down menu to display the rules.

When you choose a rule, an associated screen is displayed in which you can define the rule.

100 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration

Ports

4.21.3.1

Case Rules

The case rules are defined as follows:

• No rule — ignored.

• Search and replace — replaces all instances of the match string. (Note that this rule cannot fail.)

• Match at index — matches the match string at a specified index.

• Match and replace at index — matches the match string at a specified index and replaces/changes it.

• Replace at index — replaces/changes unspecified data in a given range.

• Add barcode prefix/suffix — adds a global prefix or suffix.

• Verify barcode size — verifies the barcode size. This rule should generally be assigned first, before creating subsequent rules.

Note: Keep in mind that the effects of previously applied rules must be taken into account when creating subsequent rules. For example, if the barcode size is important, it should be checked before any rules that might change the size are applied.

Translation information about the status of each case/rule is displayed in the scan log file (see “Scan Log

File” on page 99) when enabled. This is useful if a case fails, and you are trying to determine why a rule is failing.

4.21.4

Ports

Figure 4.5 Console and Port Replicator Port Settings

While you cannot configure the scanner, you can configure communications with a serial decoded scanner using the options in this tab.

Use these settings to ensure that the communication ports on Omnii match the settings of the serial devices to which they are connected. If the settings do not match exactly, the devices may not function.

Note that some devices can auto-detect serial port settings (such as baud rate), and in this case Omnii will dictate the settings. Baud rates often have a direct impact on performance—they should be set as high as possible while still ensuring reliable communication.

4.21.4.1

Port Replicator Port A (COM5) and Port B (COM6)

Port Replicator Port A (COM5) and Port B (COM6) are standard RS-232 DE-9 DTE ports on the Omnii port replicator module, available on some snap modules and cradle types.

Enabled

This parameter must be set to ON in order for Omnii to recognize the device connected to the Port Replicator 9-pin (COM5).

Power (COM6 only)

Pin 9 on Omnii COM6 is reserved for 5V power out and is defaulted to OFF. This parameter must be set to

ON to enable power to a Snap Module or Vehicle cradle.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 101

Chapter 4: Configuration

Ports

Baud

Double-tapping on this parameter displays a pop-up window in which you can choose an appropriate rate of data transfer.

Figure 4.6 Port Baud Rates

Data Bits

This parameter determines the number of data bits included in each asynchronous data byte. Most devices use 8-bit data bytes. Double-tapping on this option displays a pop-up window in which you can choose either 7 or 8 data bits.

Parity

This parameter determines the type of parity checking used on the data going through the port replicator port. Double-tapping on this option displays a pop-up window in which you can choose the appropriate parity.

Stop Bits

This parameter specifies the number of stop bits—1, 1.5 or 2—used for asynchronous communication.

Trigger On Sequence And Trigger Off Sequence

If a SICK scanner connected to an Omnii port requires a serial stream of data bytes to trigger the scanner on and another to trigger the scanner off , the Trigger On Sequence and Trigger Off Sequence parameters allow you to define these serial streams.

Double-tapping on Trigger On Sequence or Trigger Off Sequence displays a screen with a hex array of 10 elements.

These parameters work in conjunction with Manage Triggers sending on and off data streams to the trigger module you assigned. For example, suppose you launch Manage Triggers and choose Decoded Scanner as the ‘module to trigger’. Next, you assign a ‘trigger key’—for this example, . (period). To define the serial stream of data bytes to control the on and off function of the ‘trigger key’, enter a hex value in the Trigger

On Sequence and the Trigger Off Sequence fields. When you press the trigger key, the Trigger On Sequence is sent and when you release the trigger key, the Trigger Off Sequence is sent, turning the trigger key on and off .

102 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration

Screen Rotation

4.22 Screen Rotation

This option allows you to determine how your Omnii screen will behave depending on how the unit is oriented.

• Tap Start>Settings>Control Panel , and then tap on the Screen Rotation icon.

To Maintain Screen Orientation

Choose either the Portrait or Landscape radio button and uncheck the Enable auto screen rotation box.

Your screen will appear in that mode without rotating when the Omnii is moved about.

To Enable Screen Rotation

Check the Enable auto screen rotation box and the orientation you want. Your screen will flip vertically

(Portrait mode) or horizontally (Landscape mode) as you rotate the Omnii. If you choose All orientations , the screen rotates to portrait or landscape to match the orientation of the Omnii.

Note: Your screen orientation option starts once you press OK and then exit Control Panel.

The Control Panel screen itself is always in upright Portrait mode.

4.23 Storage Manager

The Storage Manager allows you to view information about the storage devices that are present in Omnii, such as SD-MMC flash cards and Compact Flash cards.

4.23.1

Formatting a Memory Card

Formatting a memory card bulk-erases it. Once a card is erased, partitions may be created in it, similarly to those on a hard drive. Memory-card devices are normally ‘mounted’ (made available to the system) automatically when they are inserted. They must be dismounted before they can be formatted.

To format an entire memory card:

Select Start> Settings>Control Panel .

In Control Panel, double-click on the Storage Manager icon. The Storage Manager menu opens:

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 103

Chapter 4: Configuration

Creating Partitions

Select the memory card from the drop-down list.

Press the Dismount button to dismount the memory card. All partitions on the card will be dismounted.

Press the Format button to format the memory card.

All partitions and information on the card will be erased during the formatting process.

4.23.2

Creating Partitions

Once the card is formatted, new partitions can be created in it. The default is to create one partition that occupies the whole card, but a card can be divided into more than one partition if desired. Each partition appears as a separate folder in Windows Explorer.

To create new partitions:

Press the New button next to the Partitions list box. The Create New Partition dialog box appears:

Type a name for the partition.

If more than one partition is desired, uncheck the Use All Available Diskspace checkbox, then specify the desired number of sectors to be used by the partition.

Press OK . The new partition appears in the Partitions list.

104 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration

Partition Management

The new partition is automatically mounted. This is indicated by an asterisk (*) next to its name in the partition list. Any unallocated space on the card is indicated at the left, and additional partitions can be created in it.

4.23.3

Partition Management

Partitions can be individually dismounted, mounted, deleted, or formatted as well. These and additional tasks are available from the Partition Properties dialog:

To dismount a partition:

Choose the desired partition.

Tap the Properties button. The Partition Properties dialog appears.

Tap the Dismount button. The partition is dismounted. The asterisk disappears next to its name in the partitions list.

To delete a partition:

Select the desired partition.

Tap the Delete button. A warning dialog appears.

Tap the OK button. The partition is deleted.

To format a partition:

Choose the desired partition.

Tap the Properties button. The Partition Properties dialog appears.

Tap the Dismount button. The partition is dismounted. The asterisk disappears next to its name in the partitions list.

Tap the Format button. The Format dialog appears:

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 105

Chapter 4: Configuration

Partition Management

Choose your format options. These options include:

• Version of file system (FAT-16, for devices holding up to 4 GB; or FAT-32, for devices containing up to

32 GB).

• Number of FATs (File-Allocation Tables).

• Number of entries allowed in the root directory.

• Cluster size (.5 KB to 64 KB).

There are also two checkboxes, which govern:

• Whether to use the transaction-safe FAT file system (TFAT). This file system keeps multiple copies of the file-allocation table, changing one while maintaining another as a backup.

• Whether to perform a quick format. Quick formatting removes all reference to data in the partition without erasing the actual partition. The partition will be treated as empty, and new data will overwrite it.

Tap Start . The partition is formatted.

To mount a partition:

Choose the desired partition.

Tap the Properties button. The Partition Properties dialog appears.

Tap the Mount button. The partition is mounted. The asterisk appears next to its name in the partitions list.

The Partition Properties dialog has buttons for additional functions. Partitions can be defragmented, and their file structure can be scanned.

106 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration

Stylus Properties

4.24 Stylus Properties

Note: Touchscreen calibration may not be enabled on your unit. If your screen appears to require recalibration, contact your supervisor.

• In the Control Panel , choose the Stylus icon.

4.24.1

Double-Tap

• In the Double-Tap menu, follow the directions to tailor the sensitivity of the stylus when you tap on the touchscreen.

4.24.2

Calibration

Touchscreens rarely require recalibration. However, if your touchscreen has never been calibrated or if you find that the stylus pointer is not accurate when you tap on an item, follow the directions below.

• Choose the Calibration tab, and then tap on the Recalibrate button.

• Follow the directions in the Calibration tab to recalibrate the screen You will be prompted to save the calibration data.

Note: If you do not receive a prompt to save your data, there could be a problem with your touchscreen hardware. Contact your Psion representative.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 107

Chapter 4: Configuration

Touch

4.24.3

Touch

This tab allows you to disable the touchscreen.

• Choose the Touch tab. Select the checkbox next to Disable the touch panel .

4.25 System Properties

This program identifies the computer’s software and hardware components, indicating which components are installed, their identification, version or part numbers, and whether they are enabled or disabled.

• In the Control Panel , choose the System Properties icon.

• You can create a log ( SystemProperties.xml

) of your current components, which will be placed in the

My Devices folder in Windows Explorer.

• Instead of expanding each section of items individually, you can also choose to open all the lists at once by choosing the Expand button, which will then change to a Collapse button to enable you to collapse all the sections as well.

108 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration

Total Recall

4.26 Total Recall

Total Recall is a Psion utility developed to maintain applications and settings during a cold boot, as well as clone settings to other devices. This utility creates a restore point of a device at a known state. This can be used as a backup of the device (the administrator can clean the terminal and restore the profile at any time), or a clone (the administrator can store different configurations for different uses to clone to other hand-held computers).

Note: Total Recall works differently (e.g. restore on cold boot or on clean boot) on different OS platforms and versions (e.g. Windows CE 5.0, 6.0, Windows Mobile, Windows Embedded

Hand-held). For detailed information and other updates on Total Recall information, please go to the Ingenuity Working website at: http://community.psion.com/knowledge/w/knowledgebase/total-recall.aspx

• In the Control Panel , choose the Total Recall icon.

4.26.1

In the start up screen, you can choose from four options: Create Backup , Create Clone , Manage Profile, and

Delete Profile .

Creating a Backup

• Tap on the Create Backup button to begin the process.

This dialog box displays the Profile Name and the storage destination for the profile file.

• In the Profile Name field, type a name for a profile.

• If you want to choose another location for your backup file (optional), tap on the [...] button to the right of the Profile Location field and choose one of a number of folders.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 109

Chapter 4: Configuration

Creating a Clone

Important: Any profile not stored in persistent memory (Flash Disk, external USB drive) will be erased during a clean boot, therefore you should store profiles on a persistent drive.

When performing an autorestore, the program only searches for the profile located in the \Flash Disk\TotalRecall folder. If you store your profile anywhere else it will not be restored. Only one profile can reside in that folder.

- Tap on Start . A backup of the current settings will be created and saved to the specified location.

The unit will then reboot.

To view profiles and choose restore options, refer to “Managing Profiles” on page 111.

4.26.2

Creating a Clone

Cloning allows you to copy settings or configurations from one computer to another. There are two types of clones to choose from: a Full Clone and a Settings Only Clone .

A Full Clone contains all files, most of the registry, and the settings files.

Important: The target device for a Full Clone MUST have the same model type and OS build as the source, otherwise problems can occur. For example, if the target device has a newer build of the OS, the new build may have a different set of registry keys that may conflict with the source.

A Settings Only Clone can be copied to a wider array of devices, but it should not be used as an autorestore profile.

• Tap on the Create Clone button to begin the process. Your Omnii model type and OS will be identified in the cloning statement to ensure that you target devices of the same type. Give the clone profile a name and location, then tap on Next .

• In this menu, select All for a Full Clone , or Selected Options for a Settings Only Clone . If you choose

Selected Options , a menu will open to enable you to decide which options you want cloned.

110 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration

Managing Profiles

4.26.3

Managing Profiles

You can view profiles and choose profile options from the menus in this section.

4.26.3.1

Viewing a Profile

• Tap on the Manage Profile button to see your list of profiles. Highlight a profile, and then you can choose to View the Profile Summary and go on to the next menu, Profile Details.

List of profiles Profile Summary Profile Details

4.26.3.2 Profile Options

• Tap on the Manage Profile button to see your list of profiles, as shown above. Highlight a profile, and tap on the Next button to choose from options to restore or clone the profile. You can choose from four profile options: Restore Now , Set for Autorestore , Upload to A.R.C., and Clone to USB .

• Next, tap on the option button you want to use:

Restore Now – restores the profile immediately. If you are restoring a profile that is a backup or Full

Clone, the computer will clean reset first; if the profile is a Settings Only Clone, it will not.

Set for AutoRestore – creates a profile that is automatically restored following a cold reset or a clean start. The profile is stored in the \Flash Disk\TotalRecall folder.

Important: After setting an autorestore profile, that profile will overwrite any other profile already placed in the \Flash Disk\TotalRecall folder.

In an autorestore, Total Recall only restores the profile located in the \Flash

Disk\TotalRecall folder. If you store your profile anywhere else it will not be restored.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 111

Chapter 4: Configuration

Managing Profiles

Upload to A.R.C – uploads the profile to the Active Remote Configuration server. After you tap on

Send , a message will come up either confirming that the upload was complete or that the connection to the server failed.

Clone to USB – writes a clone of the profile to the USB drive. After you tap on the button, a message will come up either confirming that the USB drive is ready for deployment, or that it is not available.

When you are ready to install the profile on another unit, turn on the next computer to be cloned and insert the USB key. The profile will be automatically installed to the computer’s \Flash Disk\TotalRecall folder. There is a short delay in deployment so that you can cancel the process if needed.

USB drive prepared for cloning Autorun installation on next Omnii

112 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

4.26.4

Deleting a Profile

• In the Total Recall home screen, tap on Delete Profile .

• In the next screen, locate your backup file, and tap on OK .

Chapter 4: Configuration

Deleting a Profile

A warning pop-up screen appears asking if you’re certain that you want to delete this file.

• Tap on Yes to delete the file.

4.27 TweakIt

This utility allows you to ‘tweak’ or adjust Advanced system settings (interface, network, servers, driver, and radio), User settings (Internet Explorer settings, font size, and docking port message), and provides a

Registry Editor .

4.27.1

Advanced

4.27.1.1

Advanced CE Services Settings

FTP Server

This option is enabled by default to allow file transfers. Keep in mind that data transfer in either direction is restricted to the Temp folder—that is, data are always loaded from the FTP Server to the Temp folder and from the Temp folder to the FTP Server .

If this option is disabled, a warm reset must be performed to accept the change.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 113

Chapter 4: Configuration

Advanced

4.27.1.2

Advanced Interface and Network Settings

Enable IPv6

This option allows you to enabled Internet Protocol specification, version 6, that has been published to enable 128-bit IP addresses (replacing version 4).

Modem Logging

When this option is enabled, Omnii logs AT commands (e.g., dial-out information, password string, etc.) that the administrator can monitor for debugging purposes. Modem commands are stored in: \MdmLog.txt.

4.27.1.3

Advanced Services Settings

SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol) Server

The SNTP Server Name typed in this dialog box is used to synchronize Omnii time with the server time. A warm reset must be performed once the server name as been entered.

114 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration

User

4.27.2

User

4.27.2.1

User Display Settings

User Font Size

This option allows you to adjust the size of the font used in the Omnii display: Large , Normal , or Small .

4.27.3

TweakIt

This option is reserved for senior administrators who have a strong understanding of registry keys and values.

Warning: Careless registry editing can cause irreversible damage to Omnii.

4.28 Voice – Using the WWAN Phone Dialer

If the WWAN modem is installed and enabled, the Phone icon and the GSM signal strength icon will appear automatically on the taskbar.

• Double click on the Phone icon to access the phone dialer.

Note: On 55- and 66-key Omnii keyboards, you can also press the [Talk] key to display the phone keypad providing it has been activated. The [Talk] key is labelled with a green telephone receiver icon. Refer to “Sending and Ending Calls Using the Omnii Keyboard” on page 116 for details.

You can also follow the steps below to access the phone dialer:

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 115

Chapter 4: Configuration

Dialing a Number

• To access the dialer, tap on Start>Settings>Control Panel .

• Tap on the Wireless WAN icon , and then tap on the Voice tab.

The Voice tab displays a phone dialer used to dial phone numbers. The Voice menu provides commands which allow you to manage your phone contacts, view your phone history, and so on.

Phone Number Entry Field

Universal

International

Dialing Prefix

Send Button

Backspace Button

End Button

Mute Button

4.28.1

Dialing a Number

To make a phone call:

• Type the recipient’s phone number in the phone number entry field.

Send button – tap to dial the number you typed.

Backspace button – tap to erase characters in the phone number entry field.

End button – tap to disconnect the phone call.

Mute button – During a phone call, tap to mute sound transmission. Tap again to restore sound.

+ button – When making an international call, the + sign can be used as a universal substitute for any international dialing prefix and is guaranteed to work worldwide. The entry sequence must be as follows: + country code followed by phone number.

Example: A standard phone number: 011 36 30 275 28466 using the + substitution is typed as follows:

+36 30 275 28466

The + symbol replaces the universal dialing prefix 011.

Sending and Ending Calls Using the Omnii Keyboard

The 55-key and the 66-key Omnii keyboards come equipped with phone keys—each has a [Talk] and an

[End] key on the physical keyboard.

• Press the [Talk] key to answer a call or to display the onscreen phone keypad so you can initiate a call.

• Press the [End] key to terminate a phone call.

[Talk] key [End] key

116 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration

Receiving an Incoming Call

4.28.2

Receiving an Incoming Call

To answer an incoming call:

• Tap on the [Talk] button; it’s labelled with a green phone receiver.

4.28.3

Voice Menu

This menu allows you to manage calls, view your call history, and if required, assign a call forwarding service to your hand-held.

4.28.3.1

Call Management

The Call Management option only becomes available in the Voice menu when at least one phone call is either On hold or Active . When you choose this command, the currently active phone call is listed in a dialog box.

Using the drop-down menu, you can choose to:

Hang Up All Calls - This option only appears when more than one call is listed.

Hang Up - This option disconnects only the call you’ve highlighted in the list.

Hold - This option places the call you’ve highlighted on hold.

Retrieve - This option is only available when a call is on hold, and choosing it retrieves the call you have highlighted from hold.

• In the Call Management list, highlight the phone number to which you’d like to apply a command.

• Choose a command from the drop-down menu, and tap on Execute to carry out the command on the highlighted phone number.

If you have two active calls on your hand-held, one On Hold and one Active , you can set up a conference call between yourself and the other callers. To set up a conference call:

• Highlight the phone number that is currently On Hold , and choose Retrieve . Tap on Execute .

Both calls will be listed as Active in the Call Management list. All calls are now conferenced so that you as well as your callers can speak to one another.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 117

Chapter 4: Configuration

Voice Menu

4.28.3.2 Call Lists

The Call List command manages your call history, listing calls you’ve Dialed , Received and Missed . When you choose one of these commands, a dialog box lists the phone numbers.

A drop-down menu provides a list of commands you can execute on a phone number in the Call List . You can choose to:

• Dial the number,

• Send a New SMS, or

• Add to phonebook to add the highlighted phone number to your phonebook. (Refer to “Phonebook” on page 119 for details additional details about the Phonebook.)

In the Call List :

• Highlight the phone number with which you want to work.

• Choose a command in the drop-down menu.

• Tap on the Execute button to carry out the command.

4.28.3.3 Services

The Service menu offers several options for your hand-held to customize the behaviour of your phone. You can, for example, bar incoming calls, tailor to whom your caller ID will be transmitted, set up call forwarding and so on. If you choose an option, it may take a number of seconds for your unit to read the network settings.

Note: Keep in mind that some services may not be supported by your network, or they may not have been subscribed to.

• Tap on the service you want to enable.

The service dialog boxes allow you to tailor your available services to meet your requirements.

118 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration

File Menu – Phonebook Management

Voicemail Access

If your service includes Voicemail , choosing this option for the first time displays a screen in which you can enter your voice mail provider phone number.

4.28.4

File Menu – Phonebook Management

Tapping on the File menu provides access to your Phonebook .

Phonebook

The Phonebook allows you to store frequently used phone numbers. When no numbers have been added to your phonebook, the only command available to you is New Entry .

To add a new phone number to your phonebook:

• Choose New Entry in the drop-down menu, and tap on Execute .

• Type the name corresponding to the phone number you want to add.

• Press Tab and type the phone number you want to store.

• Tap in the checkbox next to Store in SIM to save the phone number there, or leave this checkbox blank if you prefer not to store the number on the SIM card.

• Tap on the Execute button to save the phone number in your Phonebook .

Phonebook entries are saved even after you exit Wireless WAN.

Once you’ve added a phone number to the Phonebook , a list of new commands is available in the dropdown menu.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 119

Chapter 4: Configuration

Volume & Sounds Properties

You can choose one of the following:

• New Entry to add another phone number,

• New SMS (Short Message Service) to send a new SMS,

• Edit Entry to change an existing name and/or phone number, or

• Delete Entry to erase an existing phone entry.

In the Phonebook :

• Highlight the entry with which you want to work.

• Choose a command from the drop-down menu, and tap on Execute to carry out the command.

4.29 Volume & Sounds Properties

Omnii supports several audio options, including Bluetooth . The beeper is used for the standard sounds: key clicks, screen taps, and scanning. The optional rear speaker can be used for system (Windows) sounds and

wav files. When a rear speaker is absent, those sounds are routed to the front receiver.

• In the Control Panel , choose the Volume & Sounds icon.

4.29.1

Volume Adjustments

• Slide the volume button to the left to lower the volume or to the right to increase the volume.

• Under the heading Enable sounds for , enable the conditions under which you want the hand-held to emit a sound.

120 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration

Sound Adjustments

4.29.2

Sound Adjustments

This dialog box allows you to assign sounds to identify particular actions. For example, you can choose the sound your hand-held will emit when you close a program and choose another sound for a failed scan, etc.

4.30 Wi-Fi Config

The Wi-Fi Config application is used to configure the Omnii 802.11a/b/g/n radio for one or more wireless network profiles. A network profile contains settings for SSID (Service Set Identifier) and security options.

Note: In most situations, the configuration of your 802.11 radio will require parameter setting and access keys from a network administrator.

To launch the Wi-Fi Config application:

• Tap on Start>Programs>Wi-Fi Config .

4.30.1

The Wi-Fi Config screen is displayed.

Wi-Fi Config: Status

The Status tab displays information about the wireless network to which Omnii is configured to connect.

When there are no network profiles configured, this tab is not populated.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 121

Chapter 4: Configuration

Wi-Fi Config: Configure

Disable/Enable Radio: This button toggles between Disable Radio and Enable Radio depending on whether the radio is turned off or on.

4.30.2

Wi-Fi Config: Configure

• To configure the radio for a wireless network, tap on the Configure tab.

Connect: Used to connect to an already existing wireless network configuration.

Add New: Used to create a new wireless network configuration.

Edit: Used to change values in an already existing wireless network configuration.

Remove: Used to delete a wireless network configuration.

Scan: Used to detect and list available wireless networks. You can highlight a network in the list, and tap on

Add New to activate the network.

There are two methods available when configuring a radio network—you can either scan for an existing network or manually create a network. If you tap on the Scan button, a list of networks detected by the radio is displayed. Highlighting one of the listed networks and tapping on the Add New button creates a new profile that is completed based on the security capabilities detected by the radio. You may need to add additional information, depending on your network requirements.

If you tap on the Add New button rather than the Scan button, you can create a network manually.

Important: The steps below describe how to manually create a network. Keep in mind that this is intended only as an example and may vary from your own network requirements.

If, for example, you are using a different type of security for your network, the fields you complete may not match those described here.

122 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

• Enter the SSID (Service Set Identifier) for your network.

Chapter 4: Configuration

Wi-Fi Config: Configure

4.30.2.1

Authentication Mode

Omnii supports several classes of authentication— Open , WEP , WPA/WPA2 (Personal PSK, Enterprise, CCKM-

WPA, CCKM-WPA2) , and 802.1x with EAP . Tapping on the Auth. Mode menu displays your authentication options.

Note: Each Auth. Mode has a unique Configure Profile screen attached to it with fields appropriate to the authorization mode you’ve chosen.

Open Authentication

Open authentication does not provide security. When this option is chosen, Omnii will connect to wireless networks which do not use authentication or encryption.

WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy)

WEP provides static security to prevent others from accidentally accessing your network. If you choose this option, you can specify the type of WEP authentication— Open or Shared , the WEP security key length— 64 bit or 128 bit and the key type— ASCII or Hex . WEP Key fields are also provided where you can specify a 5 or

13 ASCII character sequence or an equivalent 10 or 26 Hexadecimal digit sequence that matches the active

WEP key on the access point.

WPA & WPA2 Personal PSK (Pre-Shared Key)

When PSK is selected, either WPA Personal PSK or WPA2 Personal PSK —a shared key must be configured on both the access point and the hand-held computer. One of the following can be chosen from the Encryption drop-down menu: TKIP , AES or TKIP+AES .

802.1X, WPA & WPA2 Enterprise, CCKM-WPA & CCKM-WPA2

These authentication modes use 802.1X

with EAP authentication. When 802.1X

is selected, Omnii uses WEP encryption with automatic (as opposed to static) keying. For the others, the user may choose TKIP , AES or

TKIP+AES encryption.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 123

Chapter 4: Configuration

Wi-Fi Config: Configure

4.30.2.2 Encryption

The Encryption menu allows you to choose the type of encryption that will be used to protect transmitted data. Choose an Encryption method valid for your network from the drop-down menu. Only the Encryption options that are compatible with the type of Auth. Mode you’ve chosen will be listed. In fact, in some cases, this menu will not be available at all.

4.30.2.3 EAP

This menu allows you to choose the EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) type used for 802.1x authentication to an access point.

The following EAP types are supported by Wi-Fi Config :

• TLS: Provides strong security via the use of client certificates for user authentication.

• PEAPv0-MSCHAPv2: Provides secure user authentication by using a TLS tunnel to encrypt EAP traffic. MSCHAPv2 is used as the inner authentication method. This is appropriate for use against Windows

Active Directory and domains.

• PEAPv1-GTC: PEAP authentication using GTC as the inner method which utilizes one time passwords

(OTPs) for authentication against OTP data bases such as SecureID.

• LEAP: Is an authentication method for use with Cisco WLAN access points. LEAP does not require the use of server or client certificates. LEAP supports Windows Active Directory and domains but requires the use of strong passwords to avoid vulnerability to off-line dictionary attacks.

• FAST-MSCHAPv2: Is a successor to LEAP and does not require strong passwords to protect against off-line dictionary attacks. Like LEAP, EAP-FAST does not require the use of server or client certificates and supports Windows Active Directory and domains.

• Complete the fields in the Configure Profile screen. If you’re uncertain about some of the options, your system administrator will be able to provide the correct information for your wireless network.

• Once you’ve completed the necessary fields, tap on OK .

124 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration

Wi-Fi Config: Configure

4.30.2.4 Verify Server Certificate

When the Verify Server Certificate box is checked, Omnii will verify the certificate provided by the authentication server during the authentication process. This requires that an appropriate certificate be manually installed on Omnii for the verification.

4.30.2.5 Enable OPMK

When used with compatible wireless infrastructure, Opportunistic Key Caching (OPMK) reduces the number of full authentications required when roaming. Only available with WPA2-Enterprise (EAP) authentication mode.

4.30.2.6 Connecting the Wireless Network

Your configured network is listed in the Configure tab. An [X] next to a network indicates that this is the network to which Omnii will connect.

• Tap on the Connect button to activate your network.

The Status tab is displayed. The Status field displays ASSOCIATING while the 802.11a/b/g/n radio attempts to connect to the network. Once the association is complete, the Status tab is populated with the appropriate information about your network.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 125

Chapter 4: Configuration

Configuring TCP/IP

4.30.3

Configuring TCP/IP

If your network is not using a DHCP server, you will need to assign an IP address.

4.30.3.1

IP Address

To assign an IP address for your Omnii:

• Tap on the radio icon in the taskbar, or

Tap on Start>Settings>Network and Dial-up Connections . Tap on the radio icon for which you want to assign an IP address—in the sample screen below, the icon is labelled SDIO86861 .

126 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration

Configuring TCP/IP

The Wireless Statistics screen is displayed.

• Tap on the IP Information tab.

Figure 4.7 SDIO86861 IP Information

Note: When DHCP is enabled, tapping the ‘Renew’ button forces Omnii to renew or find a new IP address. This is useful if, for example, you are out of communication range for a longer period of time and your hand-held is dropped from the network.

To define a static IP address:

• Tap on the Configure button.

• Tap on the radio button next to Specify an IP address to select it.

• Type an IP, Subnet Mask and Default Gateway address in the appropriate fields. Press [ENTER] to save your information.

4.30.3.2 Name Server

Note: If DHCP is enabled, name server addresses are assigned automatically.

• In the SDIO86861 IP Information tab (see Figure 4.7), tap on the Configure button.

• Tap on the Name Servers tab.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 127

Chapter 4: Configuration

Wi-Fi Config: Advanced

The DNS and WINS fields in the Name Servers tab allow you to specify additional WINS and DNS resolvers.

The format for these fields is ###.###.###.###.

4.30.4

Wi-Fi Config: Advanced

Use Windows to configure my wireless settings

In the Advanced tab you can set Windows to configure the radio, using Wireless Zero Config .

• Tap on the checkbox to the left of Use Windows to configure my wireless settings to enable this option.

Tap here to add a checkmark to activate the Windows radio configuration.

Power Save Mode

This allows you to set the 802.11 power saving mode of the radio to: CAM (continuous access—always on)

(recommended); or MAX_PSP (maximum power saving mode).

Roaming - RSSI Threshold

This sets the RSSI threshold value, below which the radio will start scanning for new access points when roaming. Values range from -55 to -90 dBm .

Roaming - AP Delta

This sets how much greater (in dBm) the RSSI of a new access point must be than the RSSI of the currently associated access point in order for the hand-held to initiate a roam. Values range from 5 to 30 dBm .

Concluding the Wi-Fi Configuration

If you’ve made changes in the Advanced menus, you will need to warm reset your Omnii.

• Choose Start>Shutdown>Warm Reset .

• A dialog box is displayed letting you know that you will lose all unsaved data. Tap on OK .

Once the reset is complete, if you checked the box next to Use Windows to configure my wireless settings, the Wireless Zero Config screen is displayed on the hand-held. Refer to Appendix G: “Wireless Zero

Config Settings” for details.

128 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration

Monitoring the Network Connection

4.30.5

Monitoring the Network Connection

The radio signal icon in the taskbar indicates the strength of the communication link with an 802.11 access point.

To access the radio signal icon:

• Tap on the radio icon in the taskbar to display the wireless statistics dialog box.

To access the radio signal icon using the keyboard:

• Press the [Windows] key to display the Start Menu .

• Highlight Shortcuts and then choose System Tray from the sub-menu.

• Use the [LEFT] and [RIGHT] arrow keys to highlight the radio signal icon in the taskbar.

• Press [ENTER] to display the Wireless Statistics dialog box.

Note: Moving in and out of the radio coverage area can have varying effects on a network session.

At times, you may need to renew your connection by logging in again.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 129

ACCESSORIES

5.1

Pistol Grips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

5.1.1

Removing the Trigger Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

5.1.2

Attaching the Pistol Grip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

5.2 Carrying and Protective Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

5.2.1

The Hand Strap - Model ST6025 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

5.2.2 The Shoulder Strap - Model ST6030 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

5.2.3 Protective Carrying Case - Model ST6090. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

5.2.4 Hard Shell Holster - Model ST6055 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

5.3 Power Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

5.3.1

Snap Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

5.3.2 AC Wall Adaptor - Models ST1050 and ST1050-AR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

5.3.3 Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor - Model ST3113 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140

5.4 Chargers and Docking Stations: General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

5.4.1

Important Charger Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

5.4.2 Charging the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

5.4.3 Installation — Chargers and Docking Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

5.4.4 Operator Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

5.4.5 Power Consumption Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

5.5 Desktop Docking Stations - Models ST4002 and ST4003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

5.5.1

Charging a Battery Installed in Omnii. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144

5.5.2 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144

5.5.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144

5.5.3.1

Charging the Omnii Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144

5.5.3.2 Charging the Spare Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144

5.5.4 Cleaning the Desktop Docking Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145

5.5.5 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145

5.5.5.1

Docking station does not seem to power on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145

5.5.5.2 Omnii charge indicator LED stays off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145

5.5.5.3 Omnii charge indicator LED is red. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145

5.5.5.4 Spare battery LED is red with a battery installed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145

5.5.5.5 Spare battery LED does not turn on when a battery is installed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145

5.6 Quad Docking Station – Model No. ST4004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146

5.6.1

Operator Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146

5.6.2 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146

5.6.3 Quad Docking Station Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

5.6.3.1

Charging the Omnii Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

5.6.3.2 Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

5.6.3.3 Connecting to the Ethernet Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

5.6.4 Cleaning the ST4004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148

5.6.5 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148

5.6.5.1

Omnii Charge Indicator LED Stays Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148

5.6.5.2 Power LED Does Not Light Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149

5.6.5.3 Omnii Charge LED Flashes Yellow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149

5.6.5.4 Omnii Charge Indicator LED is Red . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149

5.6.5.5 Powered Adaptor LED Stays Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 131

5.7 Vehicle Cradles - Models ST1000 and ST1002 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149

5.7.1

Vehicle Cradle Mounting Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150

5.7.2

Insertion and Removal of Omnii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

5.7.3

Maintaining the Vehicle Cradle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

5.7.4 ST1002 Powered Cradle Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

5.7.4.1

Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

5.7.4.2

Installation in High Voltage Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

5.7.4.4 Wiring Vehicle Power and Communications to the Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154

5.7.4.3

Extreme Wet Environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154

5.7.4.4 Wiring Vehicle Power and Communications to the Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154

5.8 Battery Charger (6-Slot) - Model ST3006 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156

5.8.1

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156

5.8.2 Operator Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

5.8.3 Charge Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

5.8.4 Charging Batteries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

5.8.5 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

5.8.5.1

Improper Battery Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

5.8.5.2 Power Self-test LEDs Don’t Light Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158

5.8.5.3 Indicator Does Not Light When Battery Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158

132 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

5.1

5.1.1

Chapter 5: Accessories

Pistol Grips

There are a number of pistol grips available to you depending on the type of back cover and scanner/imager installed in your hand-held. Refer to Table 5.1 for a list of pistol grip model numbers and the types of back covers and scanners/imagers with which they are compatible.

Table 5.1

Pistol Grip Model Numbers

Pistol Grip Description

Pistol Grip Standard Pod Kit

Pistol Grip Standard Back A Kit

Pistol Grip Standard Back B Kit

Model Number

ST6000

ST6100

ST6400

Removing the Trigger Cover

Before installing the pistol grip, you need to remove the trigger cover.

Using a flathead screwdriver, gently and carefully pry the trigger cover off the hand-held.

Figure 5.1

Removing the Trigger Cover

5.1.2

Attaching the Pistol Grip

Note: Prior to installation, make sure the trigger mechanism is securely snapped into the pistol grip body and that the trigger operates properly.

The pistol grip is attached to the back of Omnii using the four threaded inserts in the upper part of the

Omnii casing (see Figure 5.2). Four M3x6 Phillips head screws are provided.

• Position the pistol grip so that it fits snugly over the back of the unit and the holes in the pistol grip are aligned with the threaded inserts on the back of the hand-held.

• Using a Phillips screwdriver, tighten the screws to a torque of 3 lbs-in (3kgf-cm) to secure the pistol grip in place.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 133

Chapter 5: Accessories

Carrying and Protective Accessories

Figure 5.2 Attaching the Pistol Grip

5.2 Carrying and Protective Accessories

Note: Omnii Hand-Held Computer is a body worn device, and to maintain compliance with the FCC

RF exposure guidelines, use a Psion approved carrying case. Use of non-approved accessories may violate FCC RF exposure guidelines.

There are several Omnii carrying and protective accessories to help you work safely and comfortably.

Attaching Carrying Accessories

If your Omnii is not fitted with a hand strap, you can install it using the carrying accessory kit supplied.

You’ll need:

• A Phillips head screwdriver.

Important: Do not use adhesives such as Loctite to secure screws on carrying accessories.

These chemicals may damage the plastic casing.

Table 5.2

Accessories Model Numbers

Accessory

Wrist Strap

Hand Strap

Shoulder Strap

Soft Shell Holster

Hard Shell Holster

Forklift Holster

Carrying Case

Pouch

Screen Protector

134 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Model Number

ST6040

ST6025

ST6030

ST6050

ST6055

ST6051

ST6090

ST6091

ST6112

5.2.1

Chapter 5: Accessories

The Hand Strap - Model ST6025

Table 5.2

Accessories Model Numbers

Accessory

Rubber Boot:

Yellow – Standard back covers A & B

Grey – Standard back covers A & B

Yellow – Expansion Back Covers

Grey – Expansion Back Covers

Yellow – Expansion Back Covers, WWAN End-cap

Grey – Expansion Back Covers, WWAN End-cap

Model Number

ST6080

ST6081

ST6082

ST6083

ST6084

ST6085

The Hand Strap - Model ST6025

• Attach the strap to the two threaded inserts located at the back of the hand-held near the top of the unit (see Figure 5.3), using the two Phillips head screws provided with this accessory.

• Stretch the handstrap toward the base of the hand-held, and hook the clip at the bottom of the handstrap into the slot near the base of the battery pack.

Figure 5.3 Attaching the hand strap

Clip

Hand strap slot

5.2.2

The Shoulder Strap - Model ST6030

Figure 5.4 Model ST6030 features

Nylon strap

Break-away Velcro

Unlocking clip

Retaining clip

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 135

Chapter 5: Accessories

The Shoulder Strap - Model ST6030

Installation

To lock the shoulder strap in place, insert the retaining clip in the slot at the bottom of the Omnii Hand-Held

Computer (Figure 5.5).

Figure 5.5

Removal

With your thumb, place the unlocking clip tab in the Omnii top slot (Figure 5.6).

Figure 5.6

Unlocking clip tab

Top slot in Omnii

• Push down on the unlocking clip, releasing the retaining clip (Figure 5.7 — A).

• Then, holding both the unlocking and the retaining clips, pull both away from Omnii to remove the shoulder strap (Figure 5.7 — B).

136 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 5: Accessories

Protective Carrying Case - Model ST6090

Figure 5.7

5.2.3

5.2.4

Protective Carrying Case - Model ST6090

A carrying case is available for Omnii to shield the unit from damage. It is compatible with both the hand strap and the shoulder strap. A variety of cases are available, depending on the type of end-cap attached to your unit.

Hard Shell Holster - Model ST6055

A hard shell holster that includes a belt, leg tie-down, and tether, can be used to hang Omnii with a pistol grip from your waist.

• Feed the belt through the top panel of the holster, and adjust the belt as needed.

• If using the leg tie-down strap, wrap it around your leg and snap the buckle closed. Adjust the tightness of the strap for security and comfort.

• Place Omnii into the holster with the grip extending back through the custom opening.

• If desired, attach the tether to the pistol grip.

Figure 5.8 Hard Shell Holster (pistol grip tether not shown)

5.3 Power Accessories

The following accessories can be ordered for your Omnii:

Table 5.3

Description

AC Wall Adaptor

Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor

Snap Module – Power/Charger Only

Model Number

ST1050 or ST1050-AR

ST3113

ST4000

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 137

Chapter 5: Accessories

Snap Modules

5.3.1

Table 5.3

Description

Snap Module – USB Host/Client plus Power/Charger

Snap Module – DE9M powered serial plus Charger

Snap Modules

Model Number

ST4001

ST4005

Note: The Snap Modules are shipped with their own quick start guide (Omnii Snap Modules Quick

Start Guide, PN 8000220). The guide should be reviewed for additional information and updates.

Snap Modules are mobile power chargers for Omnii. They are compatible with the AC wall adaptor

(Model ST1050 or ST1050-AR) and the Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor (Model ST3113).

Three types of Snap Modules are available:

• Model ST4000 (Charger only variant): powers and charges the hand-held.

• Model ST4001 (USB variant): powers and charges the hand-held. It provides communications via USB

1.1/2.0 Host and USB 2.0 Client connectors and provides a DC IN port. When attached to Omnii, it allows

ActiveSync or Windows Mobile Device Center connectivity with your PC, and the use of a USB device such as a USB memory key or supported peripheral.

• Model ST4005 (Serial variant): provides a powered DE9M serial connector. It powers and charges

Omnii, and provides serial communications to tethered devices. The DE9M connector is capable of speeds up to 115,200 bps. Pin 9 is reserved for 5V power out and is defaulted to off . To enable power to this port, in your Omnii desktop, go to Control Panel>Scanners , which opens the Scanner Settings menus. In the Ports menu, select on for the Power parameter under the COM6 port.

Figure 5.9 Snap Module Ports

ST4000 (Charger) ST4001 (USB) ST4005 (Serial)

No ports Micro-B port Type A (Host) USB port

(5 VDC, 500 mA max)

Powered DE9M Serial port

(9 pin, 5VDC, 1A max)

Back of Snap Modules

DC IN port (12V, 2.5 A)

138 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Figure 5.10 Snap Module Installation

Chapter 5: Accessories

AC Wall Adaptor - Models ST1050 and ST1050-AR

Side rail

Locking clip

Hand strap slot

DC IN port

5.3.2

To attach the Snap Module charger to Omnii:

• Make sure that the charger connector and Omnii docking connector are free of dust or any other debris before connecting them.

• A slot in the side rail on each side of the hand-held accommodates the locking clips of the charger. To attach the charger, align it with the base of the hand-held and gently slide up until the locking clips snap into place (Refer to Figure 5.10).

• To remove the charger, press down on the base of the clip arms to release them from the Omnii side rails and slide the adaptor off.

• Connect the charger to an AC or DC power source using the appropriate regional plug or cable. Then connect the charger’s DC plug into the Snap Module’s DC jack. You can also attach an ST4001 or

ST4005 Snap Module to the Omnii and use the Omnii battery to power USB or serial peripherals, for enhanced mobility.

Note: If you are using a hand or shoulder strap, there is no need to remove it before installing the

Snap Module, since the Omnii hand strap slot will still be accessible.

AC Wall Adaptor - Models ST1050 and ST1050-AR

The AC wall adaptor available for your docking station or Snap Module allows you to operate your handheld using AC power while charging the battery inserted in the unit.

The ST1050 is shipped with adaptor plugs suitable for use in the following regions: United Kingdom, Australia, Europe and North America.

• Choose the adaptor plug that is suitable for use in your country. Slide the adaptor plug into the Universal AC power supply, snapping it into place. These two pieces, coupled together, are referred to as an

AC wall adaptor.

• Insert the DC plug into the docking station or Snap Module jack.

• Plug the pronged end into an AC outlet.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 139

Chapter 5: Accessories

Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor - Model ST3113

Figure 5.11 ST1050 AC Wall Adaptor and plugs

Adaptor plugs

AC power supply

DC power plug

The ST1050-AR wall adapter is kitted with an AC plug that is suitable for use in Argentina.

5.3.3

Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor - Model ST3113

The Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor allows you to power your hand-held and recharge your battery using power drawn from your vehicle’s automotive power outlet when used in conjunction with a Snap Module.

Figure 5.12 ST3113 Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor

DC power plug

Adaptor plug

• Attach a Snap Module to the base of the hand-held. Refer to “Snap Modules” on page 138 if you require further details.

• Insert the DC power plug on the Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor into the DC IN port on the Snap Module.

• Insert the Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor plug into automotive power outlet in your vehicle.

Note: Battery charging continues whether the hand-held is switched on or off.

140 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 5: Accessories

Chargers and Docking Stations: General Information

5.4

5.4.1

Chargers and Docking Stations: General Information

Important Charger Safety Instructions

5.4.2

Important: Before charging a battery with a desktop docking station, it is critical that you review the safety guidelines in the Omnii Hand-Held Computer Regulatory & Warranty Guide (PN 8000191) and the Omnii Hand-Held Accessories Regulatory &

Warranty Guide (PN 8000205).

Charging the Battery

Omnii Hand-Held Computer operates with lithium-ion battery pack Model ST3001. Preparing the unit for operation requires that the battery pack be charged and installed in the hand-held.

• The Snap Module is a mobile adaptor for Omnii. Three models are available—see “Snap Modules” on page 138.

• The AC Wall Adaptor operates as an AC power source and also charges the battery installed in the unit—see “AC Wall Adaptor - Models ST1050 and ST1050-AR” on page 139.

• The Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor powers Omnii and recharges the battery using power drawn from your vehicle’s automotive power outlet—see “Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor - Model ST3113” on page 140.

• The Desktop Docking Stations operate as both chargers and docking stations. Operating as a charger, both the battery installed in Omnii and a spare battery can be charged. Priority is given to charging the hand-held's battery. See “Desktop Docking Stations - Models ST4002 and ST4003” on page 142.

Table 5.4

Omnii Internal Battery Charging Times at 25°C (77°F)

% Charge Completed

100%

75%

4 hrs.

2 hrs.

During Sleep Mode

8 hrs.

6 hrs.

While Operating

5.4.3

5.4.4

Important: To avoid damaging the battery, chargers will not begin the charge process until the battery temperature is between 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F).

Installation — Chargers and Docking Stations

When installing a charger or docking station, consider the following guidelines.

• Keep chargers and docking stations away from excessive dirt, dust, water and other liquids, and contaminants.

• Chargers will not charge batteries outside an ambient temperature range of 0°C to 40°C (32°F to

104°F). It is recommended that the charger or docking station be operated at room temperature—between 18°C and 25°C (64°F to 77°F) for maximum performance.

After unpacking your unit:

• Visually inspect the charger for possible damage.

• Install the IEC power cord (if applicable) and apply power.

Operator Controls

Omnii docking stations and chargers have no operator controls.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 141

Chapter 5: Accessories

Power Consumption Considerations

5.4.5

5.5

Power Consumption Considerations

Check to ensure the mains circuit supplying chargers and/or docking stations is adequate for the load, especially if several chargers and docking stations are being powered from the same circuit.

Desktop Docking Stations - Models ST4002 and ST4003

Note: Specialized versions of the desktop docking station are available for Argentina and Korea.

For Argentina, model number ST4002-AR is packaged with a wall adaptor and a suitable, regional AR plug. For Korea, model number ST4002-KR is packaged with a wall adaptor and a KR plug.

Important: The desktop docking station is shipped with its own quick start guide (ST4002 and

ST4003 Desktop Docking Stations Quick Start Guide, PN 8000203). It is critical that it be reviewed for additional information and updates.

Omnii can be inserted into two desktop docking stations which are designed to charge the battery installed in the hand-held along with a spare battery pack: Models ST4002 and ST4003.

Important: These docking stations can only be used to charge Psion approved lithium-ion batteries.

The ST4002 and ST4003 desktop docking stations feature:

• Fast charging of the internal battery.

• Fast charging of the spare battery pack.

• A Host USB port to connect peripherals such as a printer, keyboard, etc.

• A Client USB port to connect the docking station to a PC.

Note: The ST4002 desktop dock can be upgraded to include the DE9M and RJ45 interfaces by using the ST4100 Xmod (Expansion Module).

The ST4003 desktop docking station additionally provides:

• A DE9M serial port (unpowered) and an RJ45 10Base-T Ethernet interface. Both these interfaces are compatible with the USB to Ethernet/serial drivers included in Omnii (see Figure 5.14 on page 143).

142 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 5: Accessories

Desktop Docking Stations - Models ST4002 and ST4003

Figure 5.13 Desktop Docking Station - Models ST4002 and ST4003

Omnii charge indicator

LED (far left)

(Indicates charge status of internal Omnii battery.)

Omnii charging bay

Release button

Spare battery

Spare battery charging bay

Spare battery LED

(Indicates charge status of a spare battery inserted in the rear charging bay of the docking station.)

The desktop docking station storage temperature is -30°C to +60°C (-22°F to 140°F). Operating temperature and humidity are: 5 - 95% non-condensing and 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F).

The desktop docking station uses careful charge algorithms designed to maximize battery life while ensuring the shortest possible charge time. See “Battery Details” on page 21 for more information regarding battery capacity, charge times and battery life. See “Charging the Spare Battery” on page 144 for spare battery charge information.

Figure 5.14 Back of ST4003 Desktop Docking Station

Omnii charging bay

Locking arm

Connector pins

Spare battery charging bay

Host USB port

DC IN port

RJ45 Ethernet port

Client USB port

DE9M serial port

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 143

Chapter 5: Accessories

Charging a Battery Installed in Omnii

5.5.1

5.5.2

Charging a Battery Installed in Omnii

• Insert the DC power cable to the DC IN port on the desktop docking station. Plug the pronged end of the cable into an AC outlet.

taskbar.

•Slide the hand-held into the docking station, making certain that the hand-held is securely seated on the docking station connector pins and engages the locking arms of the docking station. When the Omnii is switched on, a message is displayed briefly on the screen indicating that the unit is properly installed in the station and the docking station icon is displayed in the

The LED on Omnii lights up indicating that the unit has external power and battery charging will begin. It is safe to leave the unit in the desktop docking station while it is not in use—the battery will not be overcharged.

Indicators

The front-mounted LED on the desktop docking station indicates the spare battery charge status. The LED on Omnii is active even when the hand-held is inserted in a docking station (and in suspend mode) so that the charge status of the battery can be detected easily.

Table 5.5

Docking Station Battery Charge LED Behaviour

Charge LED Behaviour

OFF

Solid Green

Flashing Green

Flashing Yellow

Solid Red

Function

No battery detected.

Battery charging complete.

Charge in progress.

Battery is not charging due to out-of-temperature conditions.

A charging timeout, unable to read battery, or non Psion battery.

5.5.3

Operation

5.5.3.1

Charging the Omnii Battery

The desktop docking station supplies DC power to enable the Omnii internal fast charger.

When installed in the dock, the Omnii battery charge LED will illuminate to indicate the unit has external power and can charge the internal battery. Omnii charge indication follows the same convention as the charger's spare battery indicator (Figure 5.13 on page 143).

Note: Battery charging continues whether Omnii is switched on or off.

5.5.3.2

Charging the Spare Battery

Important: Do not store spare batteries in a charger for more than 72 hours. Doing so may damage the battery or reduce its charge capacity.

• Install the battery in the battery charging bay (rear slot of the desktop docking station). Place the battery contacts down to mate with the connector, and pivot the battery into place in the battery charging bay.

• The desktop docking station spare battery LED lights up immediately. During charge the LED will be flashing green.

• When the battery has finished charging, the LED turns solid green.

• The charge stops when the battery is fully charged and the LED remains green.

A full charge will take 3 to 4 hours for a 5000 mAh battery. This may take up to 8 hours if the hand-held is also docked and charging.

144 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 5: Accessories

Cleaning the Desktop Docking Station

5.5.4

Cleaning the Desktop Docking Station

Important: Do not immerse the unit in water. Dampen a soft cloth with mild detergent to wipe the unit clean.

• Use only mild detergent or soapy water on a slightly damp cloth to clean the desktop docking station.

Avoid abrasive cleaners, solvents or strong chemicals for cleaning. The plastic case is susceptible to harsh chemicals. The plastic is partially soluble in oils, mineral spirits and gasoline. The plastic slowly decomposes in strong alkaline solutions.

5.5.5

Troubleshooting

The indicators, applications, and drivers required to use and monitor the desktop docking station as a dock

(as opposed to a charger) are installed on Omnii—no applications are present on the docking station itself.

5.5.5.1

Docking station does not seem to power on.

• When first connected to the DC power supply, the charger LED should flash a sequence of red, yellow, and green.

• If not, the charger is defective and requires service.

5.5.5.2

Omnii charge indicator LED stays off.

When Omnii is docked into a powered desktop docking station and the Omnii charge indicator LED stays off, there could be a problem with the hand-held or with the docking station. Use a hand-held with a properly functioning charge indicator to isolate the problem.

Note: The desktop docking station charge LED only shows the status of the spare battery.

5.5.5.3

Omnii charge indicator LED is red.

If the Omnii charge indicator is red when the hand-held is docked:

• Remove Omnii and disconnect the adaptor DC power cable.

• Wait at least 20 seconds, and then plug the cable in again.

• If the Omnii indicator still shows a fault, the hand-held requires service.

5.5.5.4

Spare battery LED is red with a battery installed.

• Try inserting a battery that is known to be working with another charger.

• If the charge slot LED continues to show red with the known working battery, the charger is defective and requires service.

• Your Psion battery and desktop docking station are carefully designed for safety and capacity performance in accordance with IEEE 1725. If the battery or charger are not Psion approved products, or the safety mechanism is faulty, the spare charge slot LED or the Omnii LED will display red.

5.5.5.5

Spare battery LED does not turn on when a battery is installed.

• Inspect the charge slot contacts for damage (are they bent, flattened, twisted or broken?).

• Reinstall the battery and check that it is fully seated in the slot.

• Try inserting a battery that you know to be working into the charger slot.

• Disconnect and reconnect the DC adaptor, and check that the spare battery LED indicator flashes at power-up.

• If the charge slot fails to charge the known working battery, it is defective and requires service.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 145

Chapter 5: Accessories

Quad Docking Station – Model No. ST4004

5.6 Quad Docking Station – Model No. ST4004

Important: The quad docking station is shipped with its own quick start guide—Omnii ST4004

Quad Docking Station Quick Start Guide (PN 8000222). It is critical that it be reviewed for additional information and updates.

Important: When ordering a charger, you must also order an IEC-320/IEC-60320 C13 power cord separately.

Figure 5.15 Front view

Charging bays (4)

Docking connectors (4)

Figure 5.16 Rear view

RJ45 Ethernet ports

DC IN connector

5.6.1

5.6.2

The ST4004 Quad Docking Station is designed to accept up to four Omnii hand-held computers. The docking station powers the units and their internal battery charger. The docking station also connects up to four of the hand-held computers to a 10/100 Base-T Ethernet network and allows for Ethernet data transfer.

An additional Ethernet interface is available for connecting more docking stations downstream, up to 4 on the same network.

Operator Controls

The ST4004 has no operator controls or power switch.

Indicators

The quad docking station is equipped with Ethernet activity and link LEDs (see Figure 5.18).

146 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 5: Accessories

Quad Docking Station Operation

5.6.3

Quad Docking Station Operation

5.6.3.1

Charging the Omnii Battery

• Insert the DC power plug into the ST4004 rear DC IN connector (see Figure 5.18).

Important: Use IEC-320 C13 power cords approved by Psion, with the ground pin connected to a proper earth-grounded receptacle. Check with a qualified electrician if you are uncertain of your receptacle grounding.

The ST4004 supplies DC power to enable the Omnii internal fast charger. Normally, a full charge of the battery will take from 3 to 4 hours.

• Insert up to four Omnii computers into the docking station charging bays, pressing down gently but firmly to seat them securely.

• During the charge, the Omnii LED slow flashes green.

• When the battery finishes charging, the LED turns solid green.

• To remove Omnii, push down on the release mechanism on the front face of the docking bay. The handheld will detach from the docking bay release arms and can be pulled up and out.

Note: Battery charging continues whether Omnii is switched on or off.

Figure 5.17 Insertion and removal of Omnii computers

Release mechanism

Release arm

5.6.3.2

Installation

Place the charger in an area that is free from excessive dirt, dust, water and other liquids, and contaminants. The ambient temperature must be in the range 0° C and 40° C (32° F to 104° F). The docking station will not charge batteries outside of this temperature range. For maximum performance, it is recommended that the charger be operated at room temperature—a temperature range between 18°C to 25°C (64°F to

77°F).

5.6.3.3

Connecting to the Ethernet Network

Network Access

Omnii automatically detects insertion into the docking station and loads the appropriate drivers to communicate with the network. To connect more docking stations downstream (up to 4 on the same network), use the Ethernet cable supplied with your quad docking station as the daisy chain cable (see Figure 5.19).

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 147

Chapter 5: Accessories

Cleaning the ST4004

Figure 5.18 Ethernet network connection

Left-side RJ45 port

(Ethernet connector to network)

Activity LED

(flashing green)

Link LED

(solid amber)

Right-side RJ45 port

(Ethernet connector to other docks)

10 or 100 Base-T

Ethernet connector

Figure 5.19 Daisy chain configuration

Maximum of four ST4004 Quad Docking Stations on one network cable

Ethernet network cable

Daisy chain cable

5.6.4

Cleaning the ST4004

Important: Do not immerse the unit in water. Dampen a soft cloth with mild detergent to wipe the unit clean.

Use only mild detergent or soapy water on a slightly damp cloth to clean the ST4004. Avoid abrasive cleaners, solvents or strong chemicals for cleaning. The plastic case is susceptible to harsh chemicals. The plastic is partially soluble in oils, mineral spirits and gasoline. The plastic slowly decomposes in strong alkaline solutions.

5.6.5

Troubleshooting

5.6.5.1

Omnii Charge Indicator LED Stays Off

When Omnii is docked in a powered ST4004 and the hand-held’s charge indicator LED stays off, there may be a problem with Omnii or with the docking station. Make sure a battery is installed in the Omnii, otherwise use an Omnii with a properly functioning charge indicator to isolate the problem.

148 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 5: Accessories

Vehicle Cradles - Models ST1000 and ST1002

5.6.5.2

Power LED Does Not Light Up

• Remove all Omnii units, and unplug the docking station.

• Connect another device to the mains outlet to ensure there is power.

• Remove the IEC mains power cable from the charger, and check it for damage.

• Reconnect the mains cable in the charger and mains outlet.

5.6.5.3

Omnii Charge LED Flashes Yellow

A flashing yellow Omnii charge LED (the left-most LED on the hand-held) indicates that the battery is not within the allowable charging temperature range – 0° C and 40° C (32° F to 104° F). Allow the battery to come to an acceptable range before reinserting Omnii in the docking station.

5.6.5.4

Omnii Charge Indicator LED is Red

If the Omnii charge indicator is red when Omnii is in any of the four bays, the quad dock cannot read the battery, is in charging timeout, or it is not a Psion battery.

• Remove the computers and disconnect the adaptor DC power cable.

• Wait at least 20 seconds, and then plug the cable in again.

• If the Omnii indicator still shows a fault, Omnii requires service.

5.6.5.5

Powered Adaptor LED Stays Off

• Check the AC cable. Replace with the same type if the cable is suspect.

• If the adaptor LED stays OFF, the adaptor is defective and requires service.

5.7 Vehicle Cradles - Models ST1000 and ST1002

Important: The vehicle cradles are shipped with their own quick start guide—Omnii Vehicle

Cradles Quick Start Guide (PN 8000221). It is critical that it be reviewed for additional information and updates.

The Omnii vehicle cradles are highly ruggedized, single station docks. Although they provide quick insertion and removal, the cradles hold Omnii securely even when operated in high vibration environments (such as vehicles not equipped with suspensions).

The Omnii vehicle cradle is available in two models:

• Model ST1000 - Unpowered cradle.

• Model ST1002 - Powered cradle with communications port. A DE9M serial port (powered) and two USB

Host interfaces.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 149

Chapter 5: Accessories

Vehicle Cradle Mounting Recommendations

Figure 5.20 Front and back of ST1002 with Omnii

Mounting holes

Release button

5.7.1

Power/Communications port

Psion also supplies a range of standard mounts for the hand-held vehicle cradles, and the Omnii vehicle cradles are compatible with all of them.

Vehicle Cradle Mounting Recommendations

Warning: Before mounting a vehicle cradle in a vehicle, there are a number of operator safety issues that require careful attention. An improperly mounted cradle may result in one or more of the following: operator injury, operator visibility obstruction, operator distraction and/or poor ease of egress for the operator. Psion strongly recommends that you seek professional mounting advice from the vehicle manufacturer.

Ensure that you read the ST1002 Vehicle Cradle Installation Instructions document (PN 1020305), enclosed with the ST1002, for important safety information on connecting fuses.

Cable routing within a vehicle cab also requires careful consideration, especially for devices with loose cables. If you are unable to obtain suitable advice, contact

Psion for assistance. Note also that for better protection, the equipment should be mounted inside the vehicle roll cage.

Pedestal mounts are recommended for all fixed mount locations because they offer optimal operator access. In addition, for safety reasons, only pedestal mounts with fully locking joints should be used in vehicles. Always adjust the pedestal for the optimum viewing angle, and securely tighten the hex and wing screws.

The most effective way to mount the vehicle cradle is to use brackets with the MT3324 (short arm) or

MT3325 (standard arm) kit. The ST1002 requires either the MT3326 or MT3327 bracket; the ST1000 requires the MT3328 bracket. Use one of the following bases to secure the vehicle cradle/arm assembly to the vehicle:

• VESA Plate - MT3501.

• Circular Plate - MT3502.

• Clamp Base (two sizes) - MT3505 and MT3507.

150 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

• Rail Base (two sizes) - MT3509 and MT3510.

Figure 5.21 MT3325 Standard Arm Kit with Omnii Vehicle Cradle

Chapter 5: Accessories

Insertion and Removal of Omnii

MT3325 Arm

Omnii

ST1002 Cradle

(powered)

5.7.2

MT3326 Bracket

To accommodate the service loop of the connector cable, leave a 4" clearance at the bottom of the cradle.

Leave a 7" (minimum) clearance at the top of the cradle to allow easy removal of the hand-held. Refer to the detailed assembly instructions that are packaged with the cradle when selecting a mounting location

( Omnii Vehicle Cradles Quick Start Guide PN 8000221 ).

Insertion and Removal of Omnii

If your Omnii is equipped with a shoulder strap, cover, or the ST6025 Double Loop Handstrap, these accessories need to be removed before installing the unit in a vehicle cradle. There is no need to remove other handstraps or pistol grips from the unit.

• Slide Omnii into the cradle, and press firmly downward until it locks into place. On a vehicle, it’s a good idea to pull up on Omnii to be certain that it is secure.

• To remove Omnii, press the release button on the front of the cradle until it releases.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 151

Chapter 5: Accessories

Maintaining the Vehicle Cradle

Figure 5.22 Inserting Omnii into the vehicle cradle

Release button

5.7.3

5.7.4

Maintaining the Vehicle Cradle

Two latches in the cradle hold Omnii firmly in place. Although these latches are designed for at least

100,000 insertion and removal cycles, they will wear over time and will no longer lock Omnii securely in the cradle. For replacement parts and instructions contact Psion. Partial disassembly is required.

ST1002 Powered Cradle Installation

The ST1002 cradle is designed to allow Omnii to be powered by a vehicle battery. The battery installed in

Omnii is also recharged by the vehicle battery. This option accepts DC power sources over the range 11.5V to 30V. Voltages above that require the use of the preregulator (Model No. PS1350).

Warning: Applying a voltage greater than that specified, or reversing polarity, may result in permanent damage to the cradle power option and will void the product warranty.

The ST1002 Vehicle Cradle has a 44-pin connector that allows connection with either the CA3001 Vehicle

Cradle Power and Communications Cable (DE9M serial port, 2 USB Host interfaces, and power cable) or the power-only CA3000 Vehicle Cradle Power Cable. For connector pinouts and a cable connections diagram, see “Cable Connectors for Vehicle Cradle Model ST1002” on page A-5.

152 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 5: Accessories

ST1002 Powered Cradle Installation

Figure 5.23 Connecting to vehicle power

CA3001 Vehicle Cradle Power and Communications Cable

CA3000 Vehicle Cradle

Power Cable

For a diagram of a power with communications setup, see “Connecting ST1002 to vehicle power and communications in a typical setup” on page 155.

The Omnii charging LED (see “Battery Charge Status LED” on page 29) indicates that external power is available, and it also indicates the charging status of the internal battery.

5.7.4.1

Wiring Guidelines

Before installing the cables between the cradle and other devices, consider the following:

• Ensure that drilling holes will not damage the vehicle or its wiring.

• Protect cable runs from pinching, overheating and physical damage.

• Use grommets to protect cables that pass through metal.

• Use plastic straps and tie-downs to secure cables and connectors in their desired location, away from areas where they may get snagged or pulled.

• Keep cables away from heat sources, grease, battery acid and other potential hazards.

• Keep cables away from control pedals and other moving parts that may damage the cables or interfere with the operation of the vehicle.

5.7.4.2

Installation in High Voltage Vehicles

Warning: Voltages exceeding 30VDC are considered hazardous. Installation of powered cradles in vehicles that operate above 30VDC require special consideration, as listed below.

Due to the hazardous voltages present on these vehicles, it is necessary to ensure that the powered cradle power supply cable connector is not accessible to the vehicle operator, and does not get exposed to water or other liquids. Exposing an accessible power connector to water or other liquids could create a hazardous situation resulting in serious injury or death. Avoiding this hazard can be accomplished in the following way.

• Use the PS1350 pre-regulator.

• Ensure the power connector is wrapped securely with a waterproof electrical tape and installed in a dry location on the vehicle, away from the vehicle operator’s reach (perhaps under a vehicle dash or in a sealed housing).

• Cover the power connector with a waterproof heat shrink material (see Section 5.7.4.3: “Extreme Wet

Environments” for additional details).

All other installation requirements outlined in this document should also be followed for High Voltage vehicles to insure safe installation and operation of the powered cradle.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 153

Chapter 5: Accessories

ST1002 Powered Cradle Installation

5.7.4.3

Extreme Wet Environments

For extreme wet environments, or environments where it is difficult to restrict vehicle operator access to the power connector, Psion offers a waterproof heat shrink kit (PN 1030022). The kit contains 3 pieces of waterproof, high shrink ratio heat shrink tubing which can be used to encapsulate the entire connector assembly. If using this kit, please ensure that you order sufficient material to cover installation and service, remembering that heat shrink is one-time use, and must be replaced if it is removed from the connector for any reason.

5.7.4.4

Wiring Vehicle Power and Communications to the Cradle

An optional 1.8 meter (6 foot) extension power cable (PN 13985-301 with motion detect or 13985-302) is available for your powered vehicle cradle. This cable should be wired to a filtered, fused (maximum 4A) accessory supply on the vehicle. The power cradle draws no more than 4A (less if the accessory supply is greater than 12V). Any additional wiring, connectors or disconnects used should be rated for at least 10A.

Installation of the 19440-XXX fuse assembly using a 4A 250V fuse installed is mandatory, except when using a CA3002 vehicle power cable. The 13985-XXX cables are not used with the CA3002. The 4A fuse is already included in the CA3002 vehicle connector assembly.

Note: When connecting PN 13985-301 (Screen Blanking version), ensure that the screen blanking wires (clearly labelled) and the power wires (red/black leads) are reliably secured away from each other, or are separated with reliably secured certified insulation. A minimum 2.8mm distance, or 0.4mm distance through insulation, is required for the separation.

The red lead of the power cable attaches to the positive vehicle supply. The black lead connects to the negative supply—this should be connected to a proper terminal block and not to the vehicle body.

You may have the option of connecting power before or after the ‘key’ switch. It is preferable to wire the power cradle after the key switch—that is, it cannot be turned on without the key on. However, if the operator switches the key off repeatedly for long periods during a shift, it may make more sense to wire the cradle before the switch.

Keep in mind that Omnii will continue to operate with or without vehicle power as long as its battery has sufficient charge. If an unfused power source must be used, a fuse assembly (PN 19440-300) must be added to the extension power cable (the fuse and instructions are supplied with the cable). Use only a 4A fast blow UL approved fuse in the fuse assembly (PN 9016622).

Warning: 11.5–30 Vdc input only, suitable for road vehicles. A pre-regulator is required for use on forklifts. Psion recommends using the PS1350 (15-90 VDC) pre-regulator for such installations.

154 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 5: Accessories

ST1002 Powered Cradle Installation

Figure 5.24 Connecting ST1002 to vehicle power and communications in a typical setup

Omnii

MT3325

Arm/Ball Kit

ST1002

CA3001 Cable

MT3326

Mounting Bracket

MT3502 Circular Plate

PS1350

Pre-regulator

CA3002 Vehicle Power

Outlet (CLA) Adaptor

USB and Serial access*

Fo rk lif t p ow er

PS1350

Ve hi cl e po w er

* Note: The serial port is 5 VDC, 1 A maximum power out and is defaulted to off.

To enable power to this port, in your Omnii desktop, go to Control Panel>Scanners, which opens the

Scanner Settings menus. In the Ports menu, select ON for the Power parameter under the COM6 port.

Note: For the CA3002 Vehicle Power Outlet (CLA) Adaptor, replace with same fuse type and rating.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 155

Chapter 5: Accessories

Battery Charger (6-Slot) - Model ST3006

5.8 Battery Charger (6-Slot) - Model ST3006

The ST3006 is designed to charge up to six Omnii lithium-ion batteries at one time.

Important: The battery charger is shipped with its own quick start guide—ST3006 6-Slot

Battery Charger Quick Start Guide (PN 8000204). It is critical that it be reviewed for additional information and updates.

Important: When ordering a charger, you must also order an IEC-320/IEC-60320 C13 power cord separately.

Figure 5.25 ST3006 Battery Charger

TOP

Charging bay (6)

Charger indicator LEDs (4 per bay)

BOTTOM

Rubber feet (5)

DC IN connector

Drain holes (6) Bracket mounting holes (2)

5.8.1

Installation

The charger can be wall mounted using the wall mount kit (MT2031) or it can be operated on a flat surface.

Install the charger in an area that is free from excessive dirt, dust and contaminants. The ambient temperature must be in the range 5°C to 39°C (41°F to 102°F). The charger will not charge batteries outside of this temperature range. For maximum performance, it is recommended that the charger be operated at room temperature—a temperature range between 18°C to 25°C (64°F to 77°F).

156 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 5: Accessories

Operator Controls

5.8.2

5.8.3

The charger can consume up to 6 A at 120 VAC, 3A at 240 VAC. Check to ensure the mains circuit supplying the charger is adequate for this loading (especially if several chargers are being powered from the same circuit). After unpacking the unit:

• Visually check the charger for damage.

• Install the IEC power cord and apply power.

All charge indicators flash momentarily at power up to indicate that the charger is ready for operation.

If you choose to wall mount the charger, detailed installation instructions are included in the Omnii 6-Slot

Battery Charger ST3006 Quick Start Guide (PN 8000204) included with the charger kit. Be sure to locate the charger in an area where there is no risk of injury to persons walking in the vicinity.

Operator Controls

The gang charger does not have operator controls or a power switch. There is no dedicated indicator light to show that the charger is powered, but the charge slot LEDs will light up briefly when first applying power.

Charge Indicators

Each battery charge slot is equipped with four LEDs to indicate the charge status of the battery. When the

Omnii batteries are inserted in the charger, the colour and behaviour of the LEDs associated with the charging bays in use indicate the status of the charge.

Table 5.6

Charge Status Indicator LEDs

Charge LED Behaviour

OFF

Solid Green

Flashing Green

Flashing Yellow

Solid Red

Function

No battery detected.

Battery charging complete. Each LED represents 25% battery capacity.

Charge in progress. Each LED represents 25% battery capacity.

Battery is not charging due to out-of-temperature conditions.

Unable to read battery, charging timeout, or non Psion battery.

5.8.4

Charging Batteries

• Install the battery with the battery contacts facing the charger. Slide the battery between the guide rails until it lightly latches in place.

The 4-LED bar for the battery bay shows 25% charger per LED. A flashing green LED shows charging is under way. The LED directly below the slot in which a battery is inserted lights up immediately. If the battery temperature is outside 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F), the LED flashes yellow until the temperature is acceptable. A fully discharged battery will normally take 4.5 hours to charge. At full capacity, it turns solid green.

When the battery is fully charged, the charger stops applying power; the battery cannot be overcharged if left in the charger slot.

5.8.5

Troubleshooting

5.8.5.1

Improper Battery Storage

Storing batteries in the gang charger for extended periods (more than a week or two) is not recommended.

Lithium-ion batteries lose capacity if they are maintained at full charge for long periods of time. See the battery handling recommendations in “The Battery” on page 14.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 157

Chapter 5: Accessories

Troubleshooting

5.8.5.2

Power Self-test LEDs Don’t Light Up

The charge slot LEDs will light up briefly when first applying power indicating the self-test mode. When applying power to the unit, all the LEDs will light up. Yellow will show up in the 25% LED for each bay; green for other LEDs. Then bay #1 will blink a binary representation of the firmware version (V09 = 1001). If the self-test is not evident:

• Remove all batteries, and unplug the charger.

• Connect another device to the mains outlet to ensure there is power.

• Remove the IEC mains power cable from the charger, and check it for damage.

• Reconnect the mains cable in the charger and mains outlet.

5.8.5.3

Indicator Does Not Light When Battery Installed

• Remove the battery, and clean the contacts on the battery and the charge slot.

• Reinstall the battery, and check that it is fully seated in the slot.

• Inspect the charge slot contacts for damage (are they bent, flattened, twisted or broken).

• Try inserting a battery that you know to be working in the charger slot.

• Reconnect the mains power cable, and check that the slot indicator flashes at power up.

158 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

APPENDIX: PORT PINOUTS

APort Pinouts

A.1

Omnii Docking Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3

A.2 Snap Modules Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-4

A.3 Cable Connectors for Vehicle Cradle Model ST1002 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-5

A.4 Omnii Battery Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-6

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual A-1

A.1

Appendix A: Port Pinouts

Omnii Docking Connector

The docking interface on the base of Omnii is custom-designed to dock with a device via an array of springmounted pins.

The following are the pin assignments of the interface.

Table A.1

Docking Connector Pinout

Pin # Signal

GROUND 11

DC_IN

DOCK_LOW_PWR

GROUND

USB_OTG_VBUS

CHARGE_IN

GROUND

DC_IN

USBH_P

USBH_M

Pin # Signal

USB_OTG_P

USB_OTG_M

CHARGE_IN

GROUND

DC_IN

UART_RX

GROUND

UART_TX

CHARGE_DATA

GROUND

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual A-3

Appendix A: Port Pinouts

Snap Modules Connectors

A.2 Snap Modules Connectors

• Model ST4000 (Charger only variant): power and charge.

• Model ST4001 (USB Host/Client variant): power, charge, communications via USB 1.1/2.0 Host and

USB 2.0 Client connectors, DC IN port.

• Model ST4005 (DE9M Serial variant): powered DE9M serial connector, power, charge, serial communications. Pin 9 is reserved for 5V 1A max power out and is defaulted to off .

ST4001 ST4005

USB Micro B connector

(USB device/ActiveSync)

USB Type A connector

(USB host)

Powered DE9M serial port

The following are the pin assignments of the interfaces.

Table A.2

Snap Modules Connectors Pinout

USB Micro B Connector

Pin # Signal

ST4001

USB Type A Connector

Pin # Signal

VBus 1

D+

GROUND

VBus 1

D+

GROUND

SHIELD

ST4005

DE9M Serial Connector

Pin # Signal

DCD

RXD

TXD

DTR

GROUND

DSR

RTS

CTS

5Vdc 1A power out

A-4 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

A.3

Appendix A: Port Pinouts

Cable Connectors for Vehicle Cradle Model ST1002

The ST1002 Vehicle Cradle has a 44-pin connector that allows connection with either the CA3001 Vehicle

Cradle Power and Communications Cable (DE9M serial port, 2 USB Host interfaces, and power cable) or the power-only CA3000 Vehicle Cradle Power Cable. For installation details, see “ST1002 Powered Cradle Installation” on page 152.

ST1002 Vehicle Cradle

44-pin connector

CA3001 Vehicle Cradle Power and

Communications Cable

DE9M serial port

Power connector

USB Type A connectors

(USB host)

The following are the pin assignments of the interfaces.

Table A.3

CA3001 Vehicle Cradle Cable Connectors Pinout

Pin #

DE9M Serial

Signal

DCD

RXD

TXD

DTR

USB Type A

Pin # Signal

VBus 1

D-

D+

DGROUND 4

Pin #

GROUND

DSR

RTS

CTS

5Vdc 1A power out

Power

Signal

VIN (11.5 to 30Vdc)

GND (not chassis ground)

MOTION DETECT

(not ground)

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual A-5

Appendix A: Port Pinouts

Omnii Battery Contacts

A.4 Omnii Battery Contacts

Figure A.1

Battery Contact Pinout

7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Table A.4

Battery Contact Pinout

Pin # Signal Name

BATT+

BATT-CLK

BATT-ID

BATT-DATA

GND

Description

Positive lead of battery.

Plastic Rip - provides mechanical polarity.

Positive lead of battery.

Connected to GND in the battery.

SMBus bi-directional data line.

Negative lead of battery.

A-6 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

APPENDIX: OMNII

SPECIFICATIONS

BOmnii Specifications

B.1

The Omnii Hand-Held Computer (Model 7545) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3

B.1.1

Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3

B.1.2

Regulatory Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-4

B.2 Lithium-ion Smart Battery 5000 mAh (ST3001) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-5

B.3 Wireless Radios. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-6

B.3.1

GSM/GPRS/EDGE Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-6

B.3.2 802.11a/b/g/n Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7

B.3.3 Bluetooth Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-8

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual B-1

B.1

B.1.1

Appendix B: Omnii Specifications

The Omnii Hand-Held Computer (Model 7545)

Note: Performance specifications are nominal and subject to change without notice.

Hardware

Physical Dimensions

• Overall: 100 mm width x 44 mm depth x 222 mm length (3.9 in x 1.7 in x 8.7 in).

• Keypad area: 75 mm width x 45 mm depth (2.9 in x 1.77 in).

Weight

• 590 g (1.30 lb).

Processor and Memory

• Texas Instruments

AM3715 Sitara.

ARM Processor 800 MHz.

• RAM: 256 MB.

• Flash ROM: 1 GB.

• 3 axis accelerometer

Operating System

• Microsoft Windows

Embedded CE 6.0

User Interface

• Colour/Touch Display: 9.4 cm (3.7 in) diagonal.

VGA (640 x 480) Transflective.

High visibility optional: superior sunlight visibility with 165 cd/m

2 brightness.

• Keyboards:

Extreme Duty option: withstands 1.25 Joule impact, superior low temperature operation (to -20° C/-4° F), with 160 cd/m

brightness. Better abrasion resistance.

High reliability keypad ultra-white backlight.

Large selection of both alpha and numeric formats. See http://www.psion.com/us/products/handheld.htm for a list of available configurations.

• Indicators and Controls: Four multi-colour LEDs indicate the status of the battery, application, radio, and scanner.

• Side Buttons: Volume, Scan, Enter, Vertical Scroll.

• Voice, Audio & Feedback: High volume beeper: 95 dBA.

Integrated Microphone and speaker.

Optional Push-to-Talk speaker.

Walkie-talkie style Push-to-Talk – VoIP over Wi-Fi or WWAN.

Vibration feedback.

Power Management

• Battery Pack: 5000 mAh high capacity Lithium-ion (for battery specifications, see

“Lithium-ion Smart Battery 5000 mAh (ST3001)” on page B-5).

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual B-3

Appendix B: Omnii Specifications

Regulatory Approvals

B.1.2

Communication

• Expansion Ports: MicroSD slot for Flash expansion (up to 32 GB).

Multiple Internal Multi-Function Expansion Interfaces with:

- TTL serial

- USB host

- GPI0

Camera (optional)

• Colour.

• 3 Megapixel.

• Autofocus.

• 4x digital zoom.

• Dual LED flash.

• Video capable.

Environmental

• Operating Temperature: -20°C to +50°C (-4°F to +122°F)

• Storage Temperature:

• Humidity:

• ESD:

• Omnii RT15

-40°C to +60°C (-40°F to +140°F)

5% to 95% RH non-condensing.

+/- 8 kV contact, +/- 15 kV air discharge*. (*Except when SE1223LR scanner is installed)

Drop Durability:

• Omnii XT15

1.5 m (5 ft.), 26 drops to polished concrete (powered on, with accessories); multiple 1.8 m (6 ft.) drops to polished concrete.

Rain And Dust Resistance:

IEC 60529, classification IP65.

Drop Durability:

1.7 m (5.6 ft.), 26 drops to polished concrete (powered on, with accessories); multiple 2.0 m (6.5 ft.) drops to polished concrete.

Rain And Dust Resistance:

IEC 60529, classification IP67.

Regulatory Approvals

• Woldwide Safety, EMC, RF, Laser approvals

• CE Mark

• E Mark (vehicle cradles)

• RoHS compliant

• WEEE compliant

• REACH compliant

B-4 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

B.2

Appendix B: Omnii Specifications

Lithium-ion Smart Battery 5000 mAh (ST3001)

For safety instructions, please see “Lithium-ion Battery Safety Precautions” in the Omnii Hand-Held Computer Regulatory & Warranty Guide (PN 8000191) .

Parameter

Model Number

Chemistry

Capacity

Voltage

Cell Configuration

Max. Charge Voltage

Recommended Charge

Termination Timeout

Charge Temperature

Discharge Temperature

Storage Temperature

Cycle Life

Specification

ST3001 lithium-ion (Li-Ion)

5000 mAh nominal at 1000 mA discharge 20°C to 3.0 V (min)

3.7 V nominal (3.0 V min. to 4.2 V max.)

2 P1S (2 parallel connected cells)

4.2 V +/- 1%

5.0 hr - charging must stop.

0°C to +40°C (32°F to +104°F)

-20°C to +50°C (-4°F to +122°F)

-20°C to +50°C (-4°F to +122 ºF). Storage at elevated temperatures not recommended.

25°C (77 ºF)—recommended storage temperature.

300 cycles minimum with no degradation below 70% of nominal capacity based on 0.5C charge / 0.5C discharge rates (to 3.0 V) @

23°C (73.4 ºF).

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual B-5

Appendix B: Omnii Specifications

Wireless Radios

B.3

B.3.1

Wireless Radios

GSM/GPRS/EDGE Radio

Parameter

Manufacturer

Form Factor

Output Power

Control via AT

Commands

Supply Voltage Range

EDGE Data Transmission

GPRS Data Transmission

CSD Data Transmission

SMS

Voice

Interfaces

Specification

Cinterion, Model MC75i

Quad-Band GSM 850/900/1800/1900 MHz

EDGE (E-GPRS) multi-slot class 12

GPRS multi-slot class 12

GSM release 99

Class 4 (2 W) for EGSM850

Class 4 (2 W) for EGSM900

Class 1 (1 W) for GSM1800

Class 1 (1 W) for GSM1900

Hayes, 3GPP TS 27.007 and 27.005

3.2 to 4.3 V

EDGE class 12: max 236.8 kbps (downlink)

Mobile station class B

Modulation and coding scheme MCS 1-9

GPRS class 12

Mobile station class B

PBCCH support

Coding schemes CS 1-4

Up to 14.4 kbps, V.110

Non-transparent mode

Point-to-point MO and MT

Text and PDU mode

Triple-rate codec for HR, FR, and EFR

Adaptive multi-rate AMR

Basic hands-free operation

Echo cancellation

Noise reduction

Hirose U.FL-R-SMT 50 ohm antenna connector

Antenna solder pad

Molex 80-pin board-to-board connector:

Power supply

Audio: 2x analog, 1x digital

Serial interface (ITU-T V.24 protocol)

SIM card interface 3 V, 1.8 V

B-6 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Appendix B: Omnii Specifications

802.11a/b/g/n Radio

B.3.2

802.11a/b/g/n Radio

Sub-parameter Parameter

Manufacturer

Form Factor

Antenna Port 802.11b/g/n

Antenna Type

Antenna Gain

Transmit Power

Frequency Range

Channels

802.11a/n

802.11b/g/n

802.11a/n

802.11b/g/n

802.11a/n

802.11b

802.11g

802.11a

802.11n (2.4 GHz)

802.11n (5 GHz)

802.11b/g/n

802.11a/n

802.11b/g/n

RX Sensitivity

Data Rates

EVM

Bluetooth

Coexistence

802.11a/n

802.11b

802.11g

802.11a

802.11n (2.4 GHz)

802.11n (5 GHz)

802.11b

802.11a/g

802.11n

802.11b

802.11g

802.11a

802.11n (2.4 GHz)

802.11n (5 GHz)

Murata, Model LBEH1Z9PFC

Specification

Embedded surface mount module, 11.4 x 9.4 mm

* This is a combo module containing both Wi-Fi 802.11a/b/g/n and

Bluetooth V2.1+EDR radio

U.FL jack. Non-diversity.

Multiplexed between 802.11b/g/n (2.4GHz) and Bluetooth radio

U.FL jack. Non-diversity.

PCB substrate patch antenna. Covers 2400-2484 MHz @ <2.5:1 VSWR

PCB substrate patch antenna. Covers 5150-5860 MHz @ <2.5:1 VSWR

1.9 dBi

+18 dBm typical, +19.5 dBm max

+13 dBm typical, +14.5 dBm max

+12 dBm typical, +13.5 dBm max

2400-2483.5 MHz

5150-5350 MHz, 5480-5720 MHz and 5725-5845 MHz

1 to 14.

Up to 14 channels (depending on country).

Only 3 channels are non-overlapping.

36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64

100, 104, 108, 112, 116, 120, 124, 128, 132, 136, 140

149, 153, 157, 161, 165

Up to 24 channels (depending on country).

All channels are non-overlapping.

-78 dBm @ 11 Mbps

-67 dBm @ 54 Mbps

-66 dBm @ 65 Mbps

1,2,5.5,11 Mbps

6,9,12,18,24,36,48,54 Mbps

6.5,13,19.5,26,39,52,58.5,65 Mbps

32% max

-26 dB max

-29 dB max

TI Wilink6 proprietary WiFi-BT co-existent scheme.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual B-7

Appendix B: Omnii Specifications

Bluetooth Radio

B.3.3

Bluetooth

Radio

Parameter

Manufacturer

Form Factor

Antenna Port

Antenna Type

Antenna Gain

Transmit Power

Frequency Range

Channels

RX Sensitivity

Data Rates

802.11 Coexistence

Specification

Murata, Model LBEH1Z9PFC

Embedded surface mount module, 11.4 x 9.4 mm

* This is a combo module containing both Wi-Fi 802.11a/b/g/n and Bluetooth

V2.1+EDR radio

U.FL jack (shared with Wi-Fi 802.11b/g/n radio)

PCB substrate patch antenna. Covers 2400-2484 MHz @ <2.5:1 VSWR

1.9 dBi

6.5 dBm typical, 8.5 dBm max

2.400-2.4835 GHz

-90 dBm typical, -70 dBm max

V1.2=732.2 kbps and 57.6 kbps asymmetric, 433.9 kbps symmetric

V2.0=2 & 3 Mbps

TI Wilink6 proprietary WiFi-BT co-existent scheme.

B-8 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

APPENDIX: IMAGER &

CAMERA SETTINGS

CImager & Camera Settings

C.1

Required Applets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3

C.2 Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3

C.2.1

Predefined Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3

C.2.2 Barcode Predefined Presets (Barcoding Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3

C.2.2.1

Barcode Decoding Symbology Predefined Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-4

C.2.2.2 Barcode Decoding Camera Predefined Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-4

C.2.3 Image Capture Predefined Presets (Imaging Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-4

C.3 Using the Imagers Applet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-5

C.3.1

Configuring the Image Capture Presets (Imaging Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-5

C.3.1.1

Selecting a Camera. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-5

C.3.1.2

Setting the Active Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-5

C.3.1.3

Viewing a Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-6

C.3.1.4

Creating a Custom Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-6

C.3.1.5

Modifying a Custom Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-6

C.3.1.6

Removing a Custom Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7

C.3.2 Configuring the Barcode Decoding Camera Presets (Barcoding Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7

C.3.2.1

Selecting a Camera. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-8

C.3.2.2 Setting the Active Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-8

C.3.2.3 Viewing a Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-8

C.3.2.4 Creating a Custom Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-9

C.3.2.5 Modifying a Custom Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-9

C.3.2.6 Removing a Custom Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10

C.3.3 Configuring the Barcode Decoding Symbologies (Barcoding Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10

C.3.3.1

Setting the Active Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-11

C.3.3.2 Viewing a Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11

C.3.3.3 Creating a Custom Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-11

C.3.3.4 Modifying a Custom Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-12

C.3.3.5 Removing a Custom Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13

C.3.4 Barcoding Menu – Configuring Symbologies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13

C.3.5 Filter Menu – Manipulating Barcode Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13

C.3.5.1

Modifying a Barcode Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13

C.3.6 Translation Menu – Configuring Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-14

C.3.7 Advanced Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-15

C.3.7.1

File Locations for Captured Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-15

C.3.7.2

Configuring Triggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-15

C.4 Barcode Symbologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16

C.4.1

Imager Barcode Symbologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-17

C.4.2 Color Camera Barcode Symbologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-18

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual C-1

Appendix C: Imager & Camera Settings

Required Applets

C.1

C.2

C.2.1

C.2.2

The Imagers applet is used to create, modify, delete, and activate imager settings. The principal uses of the application are to decode barcodes and to capture images. This imager services application is used for cameras and imagers to configure linear (1D), stacked linear, matrix (true 2D) and postal barcodes. A Demonstration Application is provided to demonstrate how the imager works. Refer to “Demo” on page 38 for details.

Required Applets

In order to configure imaging, the Manage Triggers applet must be present in the Control Panel, along with the Imagers applet.

Note: The Imagers icon is only displayed when the appropriate imager is installed in your Omnii. If there is an imager installed but this icon is not present, additional software (ICS) may need to be installed.

To enable a newly-installed imager, press and hold down the [FN] key and the

[ENTER/Power] key simultaneously for a minimum of three seconds.

Presets

There are two methods that can be used to configure an imager using the Imagers applet:

• Use a predefined preset.

• Create a custom preset based on a predefined preset.

Important: It is strongly recommended that a predefined preset is used whenever possible. Each predefined preset contains a coherent group of settings that are known to work together in the intended environment. In almost all situations, at least one of the predefined presets results in a satisfactory outcome.

A preset is a group of exposure and image correction settings. Each preset configures the imager for a specific purpose such as barcode decoding or image capture.

Presets also allow easier and faster configuration of the imager after power-on or resume from suspend.

The predefined presets are generic and satisfy most user requirements. A custom preset can be created for a specific user application, such as: include only specified barcodes, read only a specified number of barcodes or for reading unusual media.

Every preset belongs to a preset type. The following preset types are available:

• Imaging for photo capture.

• Imaging for barcode decoding.

• Symbology selection.

At any time, only one preset of each type can be designated as the user-selected active preset.

Predefined Presets

Predefined presets are built into the imaging software and cannot be changed. The predefined presets allow you to use the imager to perform specified tasks without having to understand and set numerous variables. In almost all cases these predefined presets are sufficient.

Barcode Predefined Presets (Barcoding Menu)

These presets encompass the majority of the most popular barcodes and their subtypes. The barcode decoding symbology predefined presets define which barcodes can be decoded. The barcode decoding camera predefined presets determine how the barcode images are captured.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual C-3

Appendix C: Imager & Camera Settings

Image Capture Predefined Presets (Imaging Menu)

C.2.2.1

Barcode Decoding Symbology Predefined Presets

The following presets select groups of similar barcodes for decoding.

Note: It is recommended that the default preset be used whenever possible.

My Default

This preset uses the Symbology Settings menu to define the preset. For details about the Symbology Settings menu, refer to “Barcoding Menu – Configuring Symbologies” on page C-13.

Factory Default

This preset enables the decoding of frequently used barcodes.

All

This preset enables the decoding of all barcodes that the imager can decode.

Linear

This preset enables the decoding of all the 1D symbologies that the imager can decode.

Linear and PDF417

This preset enables the decoding of all the 1D and PDF symbologies that the imager can decode.

Matrix

This preset enables the decoding of all 2D symbologies that the imager can decode.

Postal

This preset enables the decoding of all the postal symbologies that the imager can decode.

C.2.2.2

Barcode Decoding Camera Predefined Presets

The following presets enable successful barcode image capture in almost all conditions.

Note: It is recommended that the default preset be used whenever possible.

C.2.3

Default

This preset works in a wide range of conditions. It is optimized for a normal office lighting (about 300 Lux).

Low Light

This preset is designed for very dark conditions such as inside a warehouse where the lights are kept low, or inside an unlit truck. This preset increases either the exposure time or the gain.

Low Power

This preset minimizes the use of the flash so as to conserve the battery power on the hand-held.

Glossy Surface

This preset minimizes the use of the flash so as to reduce reflection. This preset is used to read barcodes that are behind glass, or inside the plastic window of an envelope.

Image Capture Predefined Presets (Imaging Menu)

The following presets enable successful image capture in almost all conditions.

Note: It is recommended that the default preset be used whenever possible.

Default

This preset works in a wide range of conditions. It is optimized for a normal office lighting (about 300 Lux).

C-4 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

C.3

C.3.1

Appendix C: Imager & Camera Settings

Using the Imagers Applet

Motion

This preset uses a shorter exposure time so as to freeze motion.

Low Light Near

This preset is designed for dark conditions, it uses a longer exposure time and includes the flash.

Using the Imagers Applet

Configuring the Image Capture Presets (Imaging Menu)

To configure the image capture presets, open the dialog box as follows:

• Tap on Start>Settings>Control Panel .

• Tap on the Imagers icon, and if it’s not already selected, tap on the Imaging tab.

The following screen is displayed.

Figure C.1

Imaging Menu

C.3.1.1

This window lists all the presets, both predefined and custom. Presets are identified as follows:

• Predefined presets are marked as ‘R’ read-only .

• Custom presets are marked as ‘RW’ read and write .

• One preset—either predefined or custom—is marked as ‘A’ active .

Selecting a Camera

To select a camera:

• Tap on the Camera Presets drop-down menu to view the camera options.

• Choose a camera —specifically, Front Imager which is located at the top of the unit.

C.3.1.2

Setting the Active Preset

An active preset has an A to the right. To set an active preset:

• Highlight the preset, and tap on the Activate button.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual C-5

Appendix C: Imager & Camera Settings

Configuring the Image Capture Presets (Imaging Menu)

C.3.1.3

Viewing a Preset

To view the parameter settings in a preset:

• Highlight a preset, and double-tap on the View button.

The associated preset window is displayed.

• Tap on the + sign to expand the lists so that you can view the parameter settings.

C.3.1.4

Creating a Custom Preset

A new custom preset is created by modifying a preset—either a predefined preset or an existing custom preset. To create a custom preset:

• Highlight a preset, and tap on the Add button.

A screen like the sample below is displayed.

• Type the name of the new preset in the dialog box.

• Tap on OK to save your changes.

The preset list is displayed; the new custom preset appears at the end of the list. It is marked as read and write.

C.3.1.5

Modifying a Custom Preset

The parameter values in a custom preset can be modified. It is recommended that very few changes be made to a custom preset. To ensure that it will work reliably, it should be as close as possible to the original predefined preset. To change a parameter value:

• Highlight the custom preset, and double-tap on the Edit button.

C-6 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Appendix C: Imager & Camera Settings

Configuring the Barcode Decoding Camera Presets (Barcoding Menu)

• Tap on the + symbols to expand the lists so that you can view the parameter settings.

• Scroll through the parameter list until you reach the parameter that you want to change.

• For a parameter that can take a range of values:

- Highlight the parameter, and then press the [SPACE] key or double-click on the parameter.

- An associated dialog box containing the valid range of values for the parameter and the current setting like the sample screen following is displayed.

- Type a value in the field provided.

• For a parameter that toggles between two values such as on or off and enabled or disabled :

- Highlight the parameter and then press the [SPACE] key, or double-click on the parameter. Either method toggles between the two available values.

• When you’ve completed your edits, tap on OK .

The parameter list is displayed; the new value for the changed parameter is shown.

• Tap on OK to exit to the preset list and save the changes.

C.3.1.6

Removing a Custom Preset

• Highlight the custom preset you want to delete, and tap on the Remove button.

A window is displayed warning you that you are about to remove a preset.

• Tap on Yes to remove the preset or No to cancel the operation.

C.3.2

Configuring the Barcode Decoding Camera Presets (Barcoding Menu)

To configure the barcode decoding camera presets:

• Tap on Start>Settings>Control Panel>Imagers .

• Tap on the Barcoding tab.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual C-7

Appendix C: Imager & Camera Settings

Configuring the Barcode Decoding Camera Presets (Barcoding Menu)

Figure C.2 Camera Presets

Note: The top portion of the window displays the barcode decoding camera presets.

This window lists all the presets, both predefined and the custom. Presets are identified as follows:

• Predefined presets are marked as read-only. For a description, review “Predefined Presets” on page C-

• Predefined presets are marked as ‘R’ read-only .

• Custom presets are marked as ‘RW’ read and write .

• One preset—either predefined or custom—is marked as ‘A’ active .

C.3.2.1

Selecting a Camera

To select a camera:

• Tap on the Camera Presets drop-down menu to view the camera options.

• Choose a camera —specifically, Front Imager which is located at the top of the unit.

C.3.2.2

Setting the Active Preset

An active preset has an A to the right; in Figure C.3 on page C-11, the active preset is Default . To set an active preset:

• Highlight the preset, and tap on the Activate button.

C.3.2.3

Viewing a Preset

To view the parameter settings in a preset:

• Highlight a preset, and double-tap on the View button.

The associated preset window is displayed.

C-8 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Appendix C: Imager & Camera Settings

Configuring the Barcode Decoding Camera Presets (Barcoding Menu)

• Tap on the + sign to expand one of the lists so that you can view the parameter settings.

C.3.2.4

Creating a Custom Preset

A new custom preset is created by modifying a preset—either a predefined preset or an existing custom preset. To create a custom preset:

• Highlight a preset, and tap on the Add button.

A screen like the sample following is displayed.

• Type the name of the new preset in the dialog box.

• Tap on OK to save your changes.

The preset list is displayed; the new custom preset appears at the end of the list. It is marked as read and write.

C.3.2.5

Modifying a Custom Preset

• Highlight the custom preset, and double-tap on the Edit button.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual C-9

Appendix C: Imager & Camera Settings

Configuring the Barcode Decoding Symbologies (Barcoding Menu)

• Tap on the + symbols to expand the lists and view the parameter settings.

• Scroll through the parameter list until you reach the parameter that you want to change.

• For a parameter that can take a range of values:

- Highlight the parameter, and then press the [SPACE] key or double-click the parameter.

- An associated dialog box containing the valid range of values for the parameter and the current setting like the sample screen following is displayed.

- Type a value in the field provided.

• For a parameter that toggles between two values such as on or off and enabled or disabled :

- Highlight the parameter and then press the [SPACE] key, or double-click on the parameter. Either method toggles between the two available values.

• When you’ve completed your edits, tap on OK .

The parameter list is displayed; the new value for the changed parameter is shown.

• Tap on OK to exit to the preset list and save the changes.

C.3.2.6

Removing a Custom Preset

• Highlight the custom preset you want to delete, and tap on the Remove button.

A window is displayed warning you that you are about to remove a preset.

• Tap on Yes to remove the preset or No to cancel the operation.

C.3.3

Configuring the Barcode Decoding Symbologies (Barcoding Menu)

To configure the barcode decoding camera presets:

• Tap on Start>Settings>Control Panel>Imagers .

• Tap on the Barcoding tab.

C-10 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Appendix C: Imager & Camera Settings

Configuring the Barcode Decoding Symbologies (Barcoding Menu)

Figure C.3 Viewing Barcode Decoding Symbologies

Note: The bottom portion of the window displays the barcode decoding barcode presets.

C.3.3.1

Setting the Active Preset

An active preset has an A to the right; in Figure C.3 on page 11, the active preset is Default . To set an active preset:

• Highlight the preset, and tap on the Activate button.

C.3.3.2

Viewing a Preset

To view the parameter settings in a preset:

• Highlight a preset, and double-tap on the View button.

The associated preset window is displayed.

• Tap on the + sign to expand one of the lists so that you can view the parameter settings.

C.3.3.3

Creating a Custom Preset

A new custom preset is created by modifying a preset—either a predefined preset or an existing custom preset. To create a custom preset:

• Highlight a preset, and tap on the Add button.

A screen like the sample following is displayed.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual C-11

Appendix C: Imager & Camera Settings

Configuring the Barcode Decoding Symbologies (Barcoding Menu)

• Type the name of the new preset in the dialog box.

• Tap on OK to save your changes.

The preset list is displayed; the new custom preset appears at the end of the list. It is marked as read and write.

C.3.3.4

Modifying a Custom Preset

• Highlight the custom preset, and double-tap on the Edit button.

• Tap on the + symbols to expand the lists and view the parameter settings.

• Scroll through the parameter list until you reach the parameter that you want to change.

• For a parameter that can take a range of values:

- Highlight the parameter, and then press the [SPACE] key or double-click the parameter.

- An associated dialog box containing the valid range of values for the parameter and the current setting like the sample screen following is displayed.

- Type a value in the field provided.

• For a parameter that toggles between two values such as on or off and enabled or disabled :

- Highlight the parameter and then press the [SPACE] key, or double-click on the parameter. Either method toggles between the two available values.

• When you’ve completed your edits, tap on OK .

The parameter list is displayed; the new value for the changed parameter is shown.

• Tap on OK to exit to the preset list and save the changes.

C-12 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Appendix C: Imager & Camera Settings

Barcoding Menu – Configuring Symbologies

C.3.3.5

Removing a Custom Preset

• Highlight the custom preset you want to delete, and tap on the Remove button.

A window is displayed warning you that you are about to remove a preset.

• Tap on Yes to remove the preset or No to cancel the operation.

C.3.4

Barcoding Menu – Configuring Symbologies

To view the Symbology Settings options:

• Tap on the Barcoding tab, highlight All and then double-tap the View button.

To edit a default preset, you must first activate it:

• Tap on My Default , and tap on the Activate button – an A appears to the right of My Default .

Once the preset is activated, you can enable or disable the barcodes the imager will read.

• Highlight My Default in the Barcoding tab.

• Double-tap on the Edit button.

None of the other barcode decoding predefined presets are changed.

C.3.4.1

Symbology Settings

C.3.5

Note: For descriptions of the barcode symbologies, review “Barcode Symbologies” on page C-

16.

Filter Menu – Manipulating Barcode Data

To configure rules for manipulating barcode data:

• Tap on Start>Settings>Control Panel .

• Tap on the Imagers icon, and then tap on the Filter tab.

C.3.5.1

Modifying a Barcode Setting

The rules for manipulating data from selected barcode symbologies can be modified. To change the settings for a symbology:

• Tap on the + symbols to expand the lists and view the parameter settings.

• Scroll through the parameter list until you reach the parameter that you want to change.

• For a parameter that can take a range of values:

- Highlight the parameter, and then press the [SPACE] key or double-click the parameter.

- An associated dialog box containing the valid range of values for the parameter and the current setting like the sample screen following is displayed.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual C-13

Appendix C: Imager & Camera Settings

Translation Menu – Configuring Rules

- Type a value in the field provided.

• For a parameter that takes a single character:

- Highlight the parameter and then press the [SPACE] key, or double-click the parameter. The following screen is displayed:

C.3.6

• When you’ve completed your edits, tap on OK .

Translation Menu – Configuring Rules

Translation rules enable the automatic processing of barcode data. Up to 10 cases can be defined, each consisting of up to 10 sequential rules.

Note: Changes made to the translations configuration using the Scanner Control Panel program are synchronized with changes made here. Changes made in either place affect both translation tables.

• Tap on Start>Settings>Control Panel .

• Tap on the Imagers icon, and then tap on the Translations tab.

For instructions on adding, editing, and removing translation rules, refer to “Translations” on page 99.

C-14 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Appendix C: Imager & Camera Settings

Advanced Menu

C.3.7

C.3.7.1

Advanced Menu

File Locations for Captured Images

To configure the location for saved images, open the dialog box as follows:

• Tap on Start>Settings>Control Panel .

• Tap on the Imagers icon, and then tap on the Advanced tab.

To define the location where imager files will be stored:

• Tap on the File Location button.

• Type the file Name , choose the Folder and file Type .

• Choose the Location in which your files will be saved.

• When you have completed all the changes, tap on the Save button.

C.3.7.2

Configuring Triggers

Viewing the Trigger Configuration

The trigger on Omnii is configured using the Manage Triggers applet. The Imagers applet provides a shortcut to the Manage Triggers applet.

• In the Advanced tab, tap on the Trigger Control button.

• To view all the triggers and the hardware devices that are configured to use them, tap in the checkbox next to Show all modules .

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual C-15

Appendix C: Imager & Camera Settings

Barcode Symbologies

C.4

Adding, Editing and Removing Triggers

For instruction about adding, editing and removing triggers, refer to “Manage Triggers” on page 82.

Barcode Symbologies

There are two sets of barcode symbologies, one for Imager and one for Color Camera . To display the barcodes available:

• In the Imager & Camera Settings screen, go to the Barcoding tab.

• In the Camera Presets: drop-down menu at the top of the Imager & Camera Settings screen, choose

Imager or Color Camera depending on which set of barcodes you want to work with.

• Go to the Barcode Presets .

C-16 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Appendix C: Imager & Camera Settings

Imager Barcode Symbologies

• Tap on an Barcode Preset to display the barcode symbologies.

C.4.1

Imager Barcode Symbologies

The barcode symbologies for the Imager are listed in this section.

Table C.1

Imager Barcode Symbologies

All 1D With Strong Recovery Enabled

Code 39

Code 128

EAN 13

EAN 8

UPC-E

UPC-A

UPC/EAN Sharing Settings

Code 93 (disabled)

MSI Plessey (disabled)

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual C-17

Appendix C: Imager & Camera Settings

Color Camera Barcode Symbologies

C.4.2

Table C.1

Imager Barcode Symbologies

Code 11 (disabled)

Interleaved 2 of 5 (disabled)

Matrix 2 of 5 (disabled)

Discrete 2 f 5 (disabled)

Telepen (disabled)

Gs1 DataBar (disabled)

TLC-39 (disabled)

2D PDF-417

2D micro PDF-417

CodaBlock F (disabled)

CodaBlock A (disabled)

2D Data Matrix

2D QR Code

2D Maxicode (disabled)

2D Aztec (disabled)

Postal: PlanNET (disabled)

Postal: PostNET (disabled)

Postal: China (disabled)

Postal: Japanese (disabled)

Postal: Kix (disabled)

Postal: Royal (disabled)

Gs1

Color Camera Barcode Symbologies

The barcode symbologies for the Color Camera are listed in this section.

Table C.2

Color Camera Barcode Symbologies

All 1D With Strong Recovery Enabled

Code 39

Code 128

EAN 13

EAN 8

UPC-E

UPC-A

Code 93 (disabled)

Codabar

Interleaved 2 of 5 (disabled)

Gs1 DataBar (disabled)

C-18 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Table C.2

Color Camera Barcode Symbologies

Gs1 Composite

2D PDF-417

2D micro PDF-417

2D Data Matrix

2D QR Code

2D Maxicode (disabled)

2D Aztec (disabled)

Postal: PlanNET (disabled)

Postal: PostNET (disabled)

Postal: Australia (disabled)

Postal: Canadian (disabled)

Postal: Japanese (disabled)

Postal: Kix (disabled)

Postal: Korean (disabled)

Postal: Royal (disabled)

Appendix C: Imager & Camera Settings

Color Camera Barcode Symbologies

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual C-19

APPENDIX: SCANNER

SETTINGS

DScanner Settings

D.1

Barcode Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3

D.1.1

Scanner Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3

D.1.2

Restoring Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3

D.2 Decoded (Internal) Scanners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

D.2.1

Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

D.2.2 Decoded (Internal) Advanced Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

D.2.3 Decoded (Internal) Data Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

D.3 Decoded (HHP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

D.4 Decoded (Intermec ISCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

D.4.1

Decoded (ISCP) Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

D.4.2 Decoded (ISCP) Advanced Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

D.5 Non-Decoded Scanners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

D.5.1

Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual D-1

D.1

Appendix D: Scanner Settings

Barcode Settings

The Scanners icon in the Control Panel provides dialog boxes in which you can tailor barcode scanner configurations and choose the barcodes your scanner will recognize.

D.1.1

The parameters are preset with the default settings of the decoded scanner installed in the unit. For a listing of available scanners and their specifications, please refer to Chapter B: “Omnii Specifications”.

Important: To enable a newly-installed scanner, press and hold down the [FN] key and the

[ENTER/Power] key simultaneously for a minimum of three seconds.

For information on configuring the Options, Translations, and Ports settings, see

“Scanners” on page 96.

Scanner Options

(HHP) , Decoded (Intermec ISCP, and Non-decoded Scanners .

The symbologies listed change to reflect the scanner you choose and the barcodes it supports. Always defer to your barcode scanner’s programming manual when in doubt about the availability or settings for any parameter.

Note: Your Omnii comes preconfigured from the factory for internal scanner types. The type of scanner installed can be determined from the System icon in the Control Panel, under the

System Properties tab.

D.1.2

Important: To improve the decode speed and performance, enable (set to ‘on’) only those codes that are required by the application.

Keep in mind that some barcode types are only available when an internal imaging scanner is installed. All internal scanners can be configured using these dialog boxes.

Restoring Default Settings

If you want to restore the factory defaults after making changes, the defaults can be applied to a selected parameter, sub-tree of parameters, or all scanner parameters.

• Press and hold on a symbology (e.g., Code 128) to display a pop up a menu.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual D-3

Appendix D: Scanner Settings

Decoded (Internal) Scanners

• Choose Default subtree to reset only the parameters in the symbology you selected, or choose

Default all settings to reset all scanner parameters to default settings.

To reset a single parameter to its default setting:

• Press and hold on the parameter you want to reset.

D.2

• Choose Default parameter to reset the parameter to the default setting.

Decoded (Internal) Scanners

• Tap on the Scanner drop-down menu, and choose Decoded (internal) .

D-4 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Appendix D: Scanner Settings

Options

D.2.1

D.2.2

Options

Note: Some options are available only for specific scanners. Refer to the option names in this section for scanner model identification.

Dot Time (msec)

The value selected for Dot Time (msec) determines (in milliseconds) how long the targeting dot remains on before the scanner switches to a normal scan sweep. When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter a value of 0 msec , 200 msec or 400 msec . A value of 0 (zero) disables the target dot.

Laser On Time

The value assigned to this parameter determines how long the laser will remain on when the scan button or trigger is pressed.

Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can enter a value between 5 and 99.

The value is measured in tenths of seconds.

Decoded (Internal) Advanced Options

Scan Mode

You can set the method of scanning by setting this parameter to Scan beam only , Aim with Scan: 1 trigger pull , Aim with Scan: 2 trigger pulls , Aim with Scan on trigger release , and Continuous Scan Mode . Default is

Scan beam only .

Aim Duration

This parameter determines the total time the aiming pattern appears before the scanner laser begins sweeping. When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter a value from 0 to 30 (0 to 3 sec.). A value of 0 (zero) disables the aiming-dot.

Minimum Cancel Time

The value assigned to this parameter determines the time delay before the scanner is turned off, once the scanner trigger or button is released. This gives the scanner a minimum amount of time to complete its current decode before the scan is cancelled when you quickly trigger on/off.

Power Mode

This parameter is a power-saving option. Tapping on it displays a screen listing two power mode options:

Continuous Power and Low Power .

In Continuous Power mode, the scanner is always on, waiting for a trigger pull or serial communication.

In Low Power mode, the scanner is in a suspend state, drawing minimal power until a trigger pull or serial communication wakes it. Keep in mind that while this option is more suitable for battery powered applications, there will be a slight delay while the scanner powers up to scan a barcode.

Low Power Timeout

To extend laser life, you can select the time the scanner remains active following a successful decode. The scanner wakes from low power mode when a barcode is scanned—a successful decode restores normal flashing.

This is only used if the unit’s Trigger Mode has been changed to Continuous On . If the unit is used in a fixed mount this parameter might be used, but not if the unit is used as a hand-held.

When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can choose a value of 30 sec ., 1 min ., 2 min . or 3 min .

Note: This parameter is only used if the Trigger Mode has been set to Continuous On and Omnii is mounted in a fixed position; otherwise, ‘Low Power Timeout’ is not used.

Parameter Scanning

Setting this parameter to on enables decoding of parameter barcodes.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual D-5

Appendix D: Scanner Settings

Decoded (Internal) Data Options

Linear Security Level

This parameter allows you to select the security level appropriate for your barcode quality. There are four levels of decode security for linear code types (e.g., Code 39, Interleaved 2 of 5). Higher security levels should be selected for decreasing levels of barcode quality. As security levels increase, the scanner’s decode speed decreases.

Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can enter a value from 1 to 4 .

Linear security level 1 specifies that the following code types must be successfully read twice before being decoded:

Length Code Type

Codabar

MSI Plessey

D 5 of 5

I 2 of 5

All

4 or less

8 or less

Linear security level 2 specifies that all types of codes must be successfully read twice before being decoded.

Linear security level 3 specifies that code types other than the following must be successfully read twice before being decoded. The following codes must be read three times:

Code Type

MSI Plessey

Length

D 2 of 5

I 2 of 5

4 or less

8 or less

Linear security level 4 requires that all code types be successfully read three times before being decoded.

Bi-Direction Redundancy

Note: This parameter is only valid if a “Linear Security Level” is enabled.

D.2.3

When this parameter is enabled, a barcode must be successfully scanned in both directions (forward and reverse) before being decoded.

Decoded (Internal) Data Options

Transmit Code ID Char

A code ID character identifies the scanned barcode type. In addition to any single character prefix already selected, the code ID character is inserted between the prefix and the decoded symbol.

When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can choose a transmit code:

None , AIM or Symbol .

Scan Data Format

This parameter allows you to change the scan data transmission format.

Double-tapping on Scan Data Format displays the following options from which you can choose a data format: data (as-is), data [S1], data [S2], data [S1][S2], [P] data, [P] data [S1], [P] data [S2] and

[P] data [S1][S2] .

Prefix [P], Suffix [S1] and Suffix [S2]

A prefix and/or one or two suffixes may be appended to scan data for use in data editing. When you doubletap on these parameters, dialog boxes are displayed in which you can enter a value from 0 to 255 .

D-6 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

D.3

D.4

Appendix D: Scanner Settings

Decoded (HHP)

Delete Char Set ECIs

Setting this parameter to on enables the scanner to delete any escape sequences representing Character

Set ECIs (Extended Channel Interpretations [also known as GLIs]) from its buffer before transmission.

When this parameter is enabled, the scanner transmits data from PDF417 and MicroPDF417 barcodes containing Character Set ECIs, even when the ECI Protocol is disabled.

ECI Decoder

Setting this parameter to on enables the scanner to interpret any Extended Channel Interpretations (ECIs) supported by the scanner. This parameter has no effect on symbols that were not encoded using ECIs.

If this parameter is set to off and a symbol that was encoded using an ECI escape is scanned, the scanner transmits the ECI escape followed by the uninterpreted data.

The barcode symbologies for the scanner are listed in Table D.1.

Table D.1

Code 39

Trioptic Code (disabled)

Code 128

EAN 13

EAN 8

UPC-A

UPC-E

Decoded (Internal) Barcode Symbologies

UPC/EAN Shared Settings

Code 93 (disabled)

Codabar (disabled)

MSI Plessey (disabled)

Interleaved 2 of 5 (disabled)

Discrete 2 f 5 (disabled)

Gs1 DataBar (disabled)

Decoded (HHP)

To configure imagers, please see Appendix C: “Imager & Camera Settings”.

Decoded (Intermec ISCP)

D.4.1

• Tap on the Scanner drop-down menu, and choose Decoded (Intermec ISCP).

Decoded (ISCP) Options

Laser On Time

The value assigned to this parameter determines how long the laser will remain on when the scan button or trigger is pressed.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual D-7

Appendix D: Scanner Settings

Decoded (ISCP) Advanced Options

D.4.2

Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can enter a value between 1 and 10 seconds.

Decoded (ISCP) Advanced Options

Continuous Scan Mode

Setting this parameter to on keeps the laser on and continuously decoding as long as the scanner button is pressed and held down.

Minimum Cancel Time

Low Power Timeout

When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can choose a value of 30 sec,

1 min, 2 min , or 3 min .

Note: This parameter is only used if the Trigger Mode has been set to Continuous On and the unit is mounted in a fixed position; otherwise, ‘Low Power Timeout’ is not used.

Parameter Scanning

Setting this parameter to Enabled allows decoding of parameter barcodes.

Same Read Validate

The data is only transmitted after repeated reads give the same result. The value assigned at this parameter determines the number of reads required, from 0 to 10 times.

Same Read Timeout

Prevents the same barcode from being read more than once. The value assigned determines after what time period the scanner will timeout, from 0 to 2550 msec .

Diff Read Timeout

Prevents unwanted reading of other barcodes on the same label. The value assigned determines after what time period the scanner will timeout, from 0 to 2550 msec .

Add AIM ID Prefix

The AIM ID (Association for Automatic Identification and Mobility) is an international barcode identifier.

When this parameter is enabled, the AIM ID is inserted at the beginning of the decoded barcode.

D-8 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

D.5

The barcode symbologies for the scanner are listed in Table D.2.

Table D.2

Code 39

Code 128

EAN 13

EAN 8

UPC-A

UPC-E

UPC/EAN Shared Settings

Code 93 (disabled)

Codabar (disabled)

MSI Plessey (disabled)

Code 11 (disabled)

Interleaved 2 of 5 (disabled)

Matrix 2 of 5 (disabled)

Decoded (Intermec ISCP) Barcode Symbologies

TLC-39 (disabled)

2D PDF-417

2D micro PDF-417

Discrete 2 of 5 (disabled)

Telepen (disabled)

Gs1 DataBar (disabled)

Composite

TLC-39 (disabled)

PDF-417 micro PDF-417 (disabled)

CodaBlock F (disabled)

CodaBlock A (disabled)

Non-Decoded Scanners

Figure D.1

Non-Decoded Scanner Options

Appendix D: Scanner Settings

Non-Decoded Scanners

• Tap on the Scanner drop-down menu, and choose Non-decoded .

All the available barcode symbologies for this type of scanner can be selected in this tab.

A ‘plus’ sign (+) to the left of the menu item indicates that a sub-menu of parameters is attached.

• Tap on the + sign to display the sub-menu.

• To change a parameter value, double-tap on the parameter. If you need to type a value, a dialog box is displayed in which you can type a new value. If you need to change a yes or no value, double-tapping on the parameter toggles between yes and no.

If you’re using the keyboard:

• Highlight the barcode you want to work with, and press the [RIGHT] arrow key to display the sub-menu.

• Use the [UP] and [DOWN] arrow keys to highlight a parameter.

• To change a parameter value, press [SPACE] or the [RIGHT] arrow key. If a field requires text entry, a text box is displayed in which you can enter the appropriate value.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual D-9

Appendix D: Scanner Settings

Options

D.5.1

Options

• Tap on the + sign next to Options to display these parameters.

Dot Time (msec)

The value selected for “Dot Time (msec)” determines (in milliseconds) how long the targeting dot remains on before the scanner switches to a normal scan sweep. When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter a value from 0 to 3000. A value of 0 (zero) disables the target dot.

Short Code

When enabled, this parameter allows scanning of short I 2 of 5 barcodes (2 characters). When disabled, these short barcodes are rejected.

Enabling “Short Code” may reduce the robustness of the decoding since the hand-held must decode more potential barcodes; it is therefore not recommended for general-purpose barcodes with 4 or more characters.

Verify

The value entered for this parameter determines the number of correct additional decodes required after the initial decode, prior to a barcode being accepted. Higher values significantly increase the time it takes to decode a barcode but also improve the reliability of the decoded barcode.

Security

This parameter controls the tolerance for decoding edge-to-edge barcodes (Code 93, Code 128, UPC/EAN).

Lower values have a lower tolerance for misreads, but they also increase the time it takes to decode the barcode. The default value of 30 is generally a good compromise setting.

The barcode symbologies for the scanner are listed in Table D.3.

Table D.3

Code 39

Code 128

EAN 13

EAN 8

UPC-A

UPC-E

Codabar (disabled)

Non-Decoded Barcode Symbologies

Code 93 (disabled)

Code 11 (disabled)

Interleaved 2 of 5 (disabled)

MSI Plessey (disabled)

Discrete 2 of 5 (disabled)

IATA 2 of 5 (disabled)

D-10 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

INTERNAL IMAGER &

SCANNER

SPECIFICATIONS

EInternal Imager & Scanner Specifications

E.1

SE955 Scanner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3

E.1.1

SE955 Decode Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3

E.2 SE1223LR - Long Range (Decoded) Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-4

E.2.1

SE 1223LR Decode Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-4

E.3 SE1224HP - High Performance Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5

E.3.1

SE1224HP Decode Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5

E.4 SE1524ER – Extended Range Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6

E.4.1

SE1524ER Decode Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6

E.5 EV15 Imager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-7

E.5.1

EV15 Imager Decode Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-7

E.6 EA11 Decoded 2D Imager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-8

E.6.1

EA11 Typical Reading Distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-8

E.7 EA20X Imager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-9

E.7.1

EA20X Typical Reading Distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-9

E.8 HHP 5080 Imager/Decoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-10

E.8.1

HHP 5080 Working Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-10

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual E-1

Appendix E: Internal Imager & Scanner Specifications

SE955 Scanner

E.1

E.1.1

This appendix lists specifications for the following internal scanners. For a current list of model numbers and descriptions for Omnii scanner pod and back cover kits, please contact your Psion representative or go to http://www.psion.com/us/products/handheld.htm

SE955 Scanner

Parameter

Configuration

Scan Rate

Scan Angle

Voltage

Ambient Light:

Laser Safety

Electrical Safety

EMI/RFI

Environmental

SE955 Decode Zones

SE955

Decoded

104 (± 12) scans/sec (bidirectional)

47º± 3º default / 35º ± 3º reduced

3.0-3.6 V± 10%;

5 V± 10%

10,000 ft. candles

IEC 60825

UL 60950, EN/IEC 60950

FCC Part 15 Class B, EN 55024/CISPR 22, AS 3548, VCCI

RoHS Compliant

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual E-3

Appendix E: Internal Imager & Scanner Specifications

SE1223LR - Long Range (Decoded) Scanner

E.2 SE1223LR - Long Range (Decoded) Scanner

E.2.1

Light Source

Scan Rate

Parameter

Scan Angle

Scan Patterns

Minimum Print Contrast

Symbologies Supported

Programmable Parameters

Ambient Light

Power

SE1223LR

Visible Laser Diode 650 nm

35 (± 5) scans/sec (bi-directional)

23º ± 2º

Linear

Minimum 40% absolute dark/light reflectance measured at 650 nm.

UPC/EAN, Code 128, Code 39, Code 93, I 2 of 5, Discrete 2 of 5, Codabar,

MSI, UCC/EAN 128, TriOptic Code 39.

Laser On Time, Aim Duration, Power Mode, Trigger Mode, Bi-directional

Redundancy, Symbology types/lengths, Data formatting, Serial Parameters,

Beeper Tone.

Artificial: 450 ft. candles (4,844 Lux).

Sunlight: 8,000 ft. candles (86,112 Lux).

Input Voltage: 5.0 VDC ± 10%

Input Current: 115 mA typical

Standby Current: 70 μA max.

Intended for use in CDRH Class II and IEC Class 2 devices

UL, VDE, and CUL recognized component laser

RoHS-compliant

Laser Classification

Electrical Safety

Environmental

SE 1223LR Decode Zone

Table E.1

4,844 Lux to 86,112 Lux

Minimum Range

Inches

Mil Size

7.5

70 reflective

100 reflective 60

High quality symbols in normal room light.

Width of Field

Inches

120

200

240

Maximum

Range

Inches

Width of Field

Inches

E-4 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

E.3 SE1224HP - High Performance Scanner

Appendix E: Internal Imager & Scanner Specifications

SE1224HP - High Performance Scanner

E.3.1

Parameter

Type

Light Source

Scan Rate

Scan Angle/Field of View

Scan Patterns

Minimum Print Contrast

Symbologies

Programmable Parameters

Ambient Light

Laser Output Power (peak)

SE1224HP Decode Zones

SE1224HP

Laser Class 2

Visible Laser Diode 650 nm

35 (± 5) scans/sec (bi-directional)

42º (typical), 30º (narrow)

Linear

Minimum 25% absolute dark/light reflectance measured at 650 nm.

UPC/EAN, Code 128, UCC/EAN 128, RSS, Code 39, Code 93, I 2 of 5, Discrete 2 of 5, Codabar, MSI.

Laser On Time, Aim Duration, Power Mode, Trigger Mode, Bi-directional

Redundancy, Symbology types/lengths, Data formatting.

Artificial: 450 ft. candles (4844 Lux).

Sunlight: 8000 ft. candles (86112 Lux).

1.35 mW

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual E-5

Appendix E: Internal Imager & Scanner Specifications

SE1524ER – Extended Range Scanner

E.4 SE1524ER – Extended Range Scanner

E.4.1

Parameter

Type

Light Source

Scan Rate

Scan Angle/Field of View

Scan Patterns

Minimum Print Contrast

Symbologies

Programmable Parameters

Ambient Light

Laser Output Power (peak)

Specification

Laser Class 2

Visible Laser Diode 650 nm

35 (±5) scans/sec (bi-directional).

13.5° ±0.7°

Linear

Minimum 25% absolute dark/light reflectance measured at 650 nm.

UPC/EAN, Code 128, UCC.EAN128, RSS, Code 39, Code 93, I 2 of 5, Discrete

2 of 5, Codabar, MSI.

Laser On Time, Aim Duration, Power Mode, Trigger Mode, Bi-directional

Redundancy, Symbology types/lengths, Data formatting.

Artificial: 450 ft. candles (4,844 Lux)

Sunlight: 4,000 ft. candles (86,112 Lux).

1.26 mW

SE1524ER Decode Zones

SE1524ER Decode Zone A (Short Range, Small Codes)

E-6 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

SE1524ER Decode Zone B (Long Range, Large Codes)

Appendix E: Internal Imager & Scanner Specifications

EV15 Imager

E.5 EV15 Imager

E.5.1

Parameter

Light Source

Scan Angle

Minimum Print Contrast

Minimum X. Dimension

Reading Distance

Symbologies

Ambient Light

EV15 Imager Decode Zone

Specification

617 nm highly visible LED

40º

Minimum 25%

0.1 mm (4 mils)

Up to 90 cm (35 in)

UPC (E&A), EAN, RSS, Code 39, Code 128, UCC/EAN 128, ISBN, ISBT, Interleaved, Matrix, Industrial and Standard 2 of 5, Codabar, Code 93/93i, Code 11,

MSI, Plessey, Telepen, PDF417, Micro PDF417

Works in any lighting conditions, from 0 to 100,000 lux

0 Lux to 100,000 Lux

Minimum Range

Inches

Mil Size

UPC

2.5

40 3

High quality symbols in normal room light.

14.5

35.5

Maximum Range

Inches

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual E-7

Appendix E: Internal Imager & Scanner Specifications

EA11 Decoded 2D Imager

E.6 EA11 Decoded 2D Imager

E.6.1

Parameter

Scan Rate

Linear Emulation Mode

Scan Angle

Optical Resolution

Print Contrast

Versions

Symbologies - 1D

Symbologies - 2D

Voltage (optics)

Operating Current

Power Saving Mode

Ambient Light

Regulatory Approvals

EA11 Typical Reading Distances

Specification

2D mode: 56 images/s auto adaptive

200 scans/s auto adaptive

38.9° (horizontal), 25.4° (vertical)

752 (H) x 480 (V) pixels, 256 gray levels down to 25%

Standard range

EAN/UPC, GS1 Databar (limited expanded & omni-directional), RSS, Code 39, Code

128, UCC/EAN 128, ISBN, ISBT, Interleaved/Matrix/ Industrial and Standard 2 of 5,

Codabar, Code 93/93i, Code 11, MSI, Plessey, Telepen, postal codes (Australian Post,

BPO, Canada Post, Dutch Post, Japan Post, PostNet, Sweden Post)

Data Matrix, PDF417, Micro PDF 417, Codablock Maxicode, QR, Aztec GS1 composite codes

3.3V -5% / +10% (typical values)

170mA - 310mA (lighting condition dependent)

2mA

Works in any lighting conditions, from 0 to 100,000 lux

UL, VDE certified, RoHS compliant

E-8 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

E.7

E.7.1

Appendix E: Internal Imager & Scanner Specifications

EA20X Imager

Parameter

Light Source

Scan Rate

Linear Emulation Mode

Scan Angle

Framing Angles

Optical Resolution

Print Contrast

Minimum Resolution

Symbologies - 1D

Symbologies - 2D

Voltage

Operating Current

Power Saving Mode

Ambient Light

Regulatory Approvals

Specification

617nm highly visible LED, 650nm laser framing/aiming

2D mode: 60 images/s auto adaptive

200 scans/s auto adaptive

26.0° (horizontal), 16.8° (vertical)

25.0° (horizontal), 16.0° (vertical)

752 (H) x 480 (V) pixels, 256 gray levels down to 30% on 1D, 35% on 2D

1D symbologies 0.15 mm (6 mil), Stacked (PDF417) 0.17 (6.6 mil) and 2D matrix 0.18 (7mil)

EAN/UPC, GS1 Databar (limited expanded & omni-directional), RSS, Code 39, Code 128,

UCC/EAN 128, ISBN, ISBT, Interleaved/Matrix/ Industrial and Standard 2 of 5, Codabar,

Code 93/93i, Code 11, MSI, Plessey, Telepen, postal codes (Australian Post, BPO, Canada

Post, Dutch Post, Japan Post, PostNet, Sweden Post)

Data Matrix, PDF417, Micro PDF 417, Codablock Maxicode, QR, Aztec GS1 composite codes

3.3V± 5%

410mA @ 3.3V scanning with power save

7mA

From 0 to 100,000 lux

UL, cUL, VDE certified, RoHS compliant, Class 2 Laser

EA20X Typical Reading Distances

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual E-9

Appendix E: Internal Imager & Scanner Specifications

HHP 5080 Imager/Decoder

E.8

E.8.1

HHP 5080 Imager/Decoder

Parameter

Focal Point - SR

Focal Point - SF

Image Sensor

Motion Tolerance

Rotational Sensitivity

Viewing Angle

Ambient Light

Illumination LEDs

Aiming

Input Voltage - Imager

Input Voltage - HHP 5080

Current Draw - Imager

Current Draw - HHP 5080

Symbologies:

2 Dimensional

Linear

Postal

Specification

7 inches (17.8 cm) from lens plate

4.5 inches (11.4 cm) from lens plate

752 x 480 CMOS sensor

4 inches per second

360°

±40°

Total darkness to 100,000 lux (full sunlight)

626 nm ± 30 nm

LEDs: 526 nm ± 30 nm

Laser: 650 nm ± 10 nm

3.3 VDC ± 5% (23°C)

3.0 VDC to 5.5 VDC (23°C)

Max. Operating Current: 100 mA; Standby Current: 100 μA

Average Current (Interlaced Mode): 510 mA; Standby Current: 120 μA ;

Peak: 600 mA

PDF417, MicroPDF417, MaxiCode, Data Matrix, QR Code, Aztec, Aztec

Mesa, Code 49, UCC Composite

Code 39, Code 128, Codabar, UPC, EAN, Interleaved 2 of 5, Reduced

Space Symbology, Code 93, Codablock

Postnet (US), Planet Code, BPO 4 State, Canadian Post, Japanese Post,

KIX (Netherlands) Post

HHP 5080 Working Range

Data is characterized at 23°C (73.4°F) and 0 lux ambient light.

Size (mil) Near Symbology

Linear

PDF417

UPC

Data Matrix

MaxiCode

PDF417

Linear

Data Matrix

Linear

UPC

8.3 (.020cm)

10 (.025cm)

13 (.033cm)

15 (.038cm)

35 (.089cm)

6.6 (.017cm)

7.5 (.019cm)

12.5 (.021cm)

8.3 (.021cm)

10 Linear

13 (.033cm)

3.5 in. (8.9cm)

3.1 in. (7.9cm)

2.1 in. (5.3cm)

2.3 in. (5.8cm)

3.1 in. (7.9cm)

2.0 in. (5.1cm)

2.8 in. (7.1cm)

2.5 in. (6.4cm)

3.4 in. (8.6cm)

2.2 in. (5.6cm)

2.0 in. (5.1cm)

Far

7.6 in. (19.3cm)

9 in. (22.9cm)

13.2 in. (33.5cm)

10.2 in. (25.9cm)

8.8 in. (22.4cm)

13.0 in. (33cm)

6 in. (15.2cm)

6.5 in. (16.5cm)

5.7 in. (14.5cm)

5.4 in. (13.7cm)

7.6 in. (19.3cm)

8.9 in. (22.6cm)

E-10 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

APPENDIX: WIRELESS

WIDE AREA NETWORK

(WWAN) SETTINGS

FWireless Wide Area Network (WWAN) Settings

F.1

Wireless WAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-3

F.1.1

Taskbar Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-3

F.1.2

Establishing a Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-3

F.1.2.1

Disconnecting From a Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-4

F.1.2.2

Shutting Down the Wireless WAN User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-4

F.1.3

Advanced Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-5

F.1.3.1

Entering a PIN Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-5

F.1.3.2

Error States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-5

F.1.4

Tools Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-6

F.1.4.1

Data Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-6

F.1.4.2

Security Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-9

F.1.4.3

Network Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-9

F.1.4.4

Driver Mode Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-10

F.1.4.5

Modem Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-11

F.1.4.6

User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-11

F.1.5

SMS Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-12

F.1.5.1

New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-12

F.1.5.2

Inbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-12

F.1.5.3

Outbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-13

F.1.5.4

SMS Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-13

F.1.6

Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-13

F.2

Power Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-13

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual F-1

F.1

F.1.1

F.1.2

Appendix F: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN) Settings

Wireless WAN

Psion offers the MC75i GSM/GPRS/EDGE radio. An Omnii Hand-Held Computer equipped with a GSM/GPRS radio has wide area networking capabilities. With this radio and a SIM card, you can wirelessly transfer data, and you use the Omnii voice option to place phone calls.

Taskbar Icons

Wireless WAN icons in the taskbar indicate the status of your wide area network connection. Note that these icons are only visible when a GSM/GPRS radio is installed in the computer, and the interface is enabled.

The following taskbar icons are used:

• G - GSM/GPRS

• E - GSM/EDGE

User interaction is required (e.g. the user is required to enter a PIN).

A non-recoverable (fatal) error has occurred.

The modem status is unknown or the modem is not connected to any network (the signal strength is 0%).

The modem has found a network, and the signal strength is between 1% and 20%.

The modem has found a network, and the signal strength is between 21% and 40%.

The modem has found a network, and the signal strength is between 41% and 60%.

The modem has found a network, and the signal strength is between 61% and 80%.

The modem has found a network, and the signal strength is between 81% and 100%.

Once the modem detects that a packet data service is available, a letter is added to the signal strength icon indicating the kind of packet data service. Keep in mind that the signal strength icon is displayed without a letter if packet data service is not available, or if it is available but not yet initialized.

For example:

The modem has found a network, the signal strength is between 41% and 60%, and GSM/GPRS packet service is available.

The signal strength icon is replaced by a connection indicator icon when a packet data connection is started:

A GPRS packet data connection is active.

In addition to the signal strength or connection indicator a second icon may be shown.

A new SMS (Short Message Service) message has arrived.

The dialer icon is displayed when the Voice option is available (SIM card and GPRS radio are installed).

When you have an active call, this icon flashes yellow, and then green.

Establishing a Connection

To display the main Wireless WAN dialog box:

• Double-tap on the Wireless WAN icon in the taskbar.

If the icon is not visible in the taskbar, the radio interface has been shut down or the modem has been removed:

• In the Control Panel , choose the Wireless WAN icon.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual F-3

Appendix F: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN) Settings

Establishing a Connection

The main Wireless WAN dialog box is displayed.

Figure F.1

Establishing a Connection

Note: If you are prompted to enter a PIN, refer to“Entering a PIN Number” on page F-5 for details.

When “ Ready to connect” is displayed in the Status field, the Connect Data button is enabled.

• Tap on the Connect Data button.

The progress of the connection is tracked in the Status field.

• Connecting.

• PPP link to modem active.

• Authenticating user.

• User authenticated.

• Connected.

Note: Keep in mind that these states may be displayed fairly quickly if the progress of the connection is rapid.

When the connection state reaches PPP link to modem active , the taskbar icon changes to indicate an active connection. The Connect Data button changes to Disconnect .

F.1.2.1

Disconnecting From a Network

To disconnect from the network:

• Tap the stylus on the Disconnect button, and then on OK .

When the computer’s network connection is severed, the Status field displays “ Ready to connect”.

The signal strength is displayed in the main Wireless WAN screen, even while a connection is active. The Rx bytes and Tx bytes fields estimate the amount of data transmitted and received, respectively.

F.1.2.2

Shutting Down the Wireless WAN User Interface

While it is not usual to shut down the GSM/GPRS user interface, you can accomplish this by tapping on the

File menu and choosing the Exit command at the bottom of the main Wireless WAN dialog box.

Note: Once you’ve shut down the user interface, you can only enable the radio by opening the Control Panel and tapping on the Wireless WAN icon to display the Wireless WAN dialog box.

F-4 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Appendix F: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN) Settings

Advanced Information

F.1.3

F.1.3.1

F.1.3.2

Advanced Information

In most cases, when a GSM/GPRS radio and SIM are installed in your computer, setup is automatic. Follow the steps outlined under the heading “Establishing a Connection” on page F-3 to make a connection. The information in this section is for advanced setup purposes.

Entering a PIN Number

If a PIN is required, a PIN entry dialog box is displayed.

• Type your PIN, and press [ENTER] .

Note: If you exceed the number of allowable attempts, a PUK entry window is brought to the foreground. You’ll need to enter a new PIN number.

Once the correct PIN or PUK is entered or if none was required, the modem is instructed to perform a GSM network registration followed by a GPRS attach. The main Wireless WAN dialog box reflects the progress of the initialization.

• Searching for modem.

• Initializing modem.

• SIM is ready.

• Searching for network.

• Registered on network.

• Searching for GPRS.

• Ready to connect.

If the modem loses the connection to the GSM network, the following states are repeated: Searching for network , Registered on network , Searching for packet data , and Ready to connect .

Error States

The following temporary error states (i.e., these states may disappear without interaction) may be displayed:

• Emergency calls only.

The modem has found a network but is not allowed to register (e.g. no roaming agreement between networks). The modem keeps searching for another network.

• No network found.

A network is not currently available. The modem continues searching for a network.

• Packet data not available.

The current network does not support a packet data service.

• Packet data not allowed.

The modem is not allowed to use the packet data service on the current network (e.g. no GPRS roaming agreement between network; a roaming agreement for voice may still be in place). It is also possible that you do not have a subscription for GPRS at all.

The remaining error states are permanent:

• SIM is missing.

The SIM card is missing. After the SIM has been inserted a warm boot may be required.

• SIM failure.

The SIM card is permanently disabled (e.g. because the wrong PUK has been entered too many times).

A new SIM is needed.

• Modem failure.

The modem did not respond to commands as expected. If a warm boot does not clear this condition, the modem may need to be replaced.

• NDIS error.

An internal software error has occurred. If a warm boot does not clear this condition, Psion technical support may need to investigate further.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual F-5

Appendix F: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN) Settings

Tools Menu

F.1.4

Tools Menu

The Tools menu in the main Wireless WAN dialog box offers some additional, advanced setup features.

F.1.4.1

Data Configuration

Enable Automatic Connect

If the Enable automatic connect checkbox is checked (unchecked by default), the Wireless WAN user interface will attempt to establish a GPRS connection whenever GPRS is available (e.g. after resume from suspend without further user interaction).

To activate the automatic connection mode:

• Tap on the OK button.

While automatic connection mode is enabled, the Connect Data button in the main Wireless LAN dialog box changes to Disable Auto . To close the currently active connection (if any) and disable the automatic connection mode:

• Tap on Disable Auto.

Important: Automatic connection mode should not be used if applications other than the

Wireless WAN user interface (e.g. Connection Manager) are expected to open and close connections.

If the automatic connection mode is enabled and another application closes the

GPRS connection, the WWAN user interface will immediately try to re-establish the connection.

F-6 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Appendix F: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN) Settings

Tools Menu

Use Virtual Serial Port

If Use virtual serial port is enabled, packet data connections are established through the virtual serial port of the WWAN driver rather than through the WWAN driver directly. This checkbox should only be checked if certain third-party VPN (Virtual Private Network) clients are used that do not work correctly otherwise. The default setting is disabled (unchecked).

Note: The connection setup takes longer through the virtual serial port.

Enable Automatic Configuration

In most cases, the data connection is configured automatically and no user interaction is required . This is true even if multiple SIM cards from different operators are used with the same device. The connection parameters are adjusted automatically when a new SIM card is detected (this may require a warm boot). The connection parameters are retrieved from a database.

Manual configuration should be necessary only if:

• One or more parameters in the database are incorrect or a new operator is not yet in the database.

(The database should be corrected for subsequent software releases.)

• An operator has assigned individual GPRS user names and passwords.

• A very large site has its own APN. Such connections always have to be configured manually.

• A customer has subscribed for a static IP address. By definition this must be configured manually.

• An operator may use a different APN for certain groups of customers. Since the automatic configuration can configure only one APN per operator such connections have to be configured manually.

Profiles

In the following section, all the parameters that need to be configured for a connection (such as APN, user name, password, DNS server addresses etc.) are referred to as a ‘profile’. Every profile is identified by an arbitrary, unique name. The profile named Default is special in that it is always present and can neither be edited nor deleted. The Default profile uses parameters from a built-in database. The home network (the network that issued the SIM) is used for the database look-up. While there can be many configured profiles, only one profile can be active at any time.

If connection profiles are configured manually, the Enable automatic configuration checkbox should normally be unchecked.

In one particular use case, manually configured profiles may be combined with automatic configuration. If multiple SIM cards are used with the same device, each SIM card being from a different operator and some or all of them requiring a manually set up profile, automatic configuration may be used to automatically pick the correct manually configured profile for each SIM card. For this to work, each profile must be configured while the corresponding SIM card is inserted in the device and initialized (i.e. the status is at least

Searching for network ).

The Select profile: drop-down list in the data configuration profile selects to which profile a subsequent action applies. A profile named Default is always present and contains the current parameters from the database. The following actions are available:

Show

The parameters for the selected profile are displayed when you tap the stylus on this button. For the

Default profile, the publicly known password is shown—otherwise, the password is hidden.

Edit

The parameters of the selected profile can be edited when you choose the Edit button. Keep in mind that you cannot edit the Default profile.

Delete

The selected profile is deleted. You cannot delete the Default profile.

Activate

When this button is chosen, the selected profile becomes the active profile. Activation is possible only if the

Enable automatic configuration: checkbox is unchecked.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual F-7

Appendix F: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN) Settings

Tools Menu

New

Tapping on the New button allows you to create a new profile.

Figure F.2

Creating a New Profile

The name of the newly created profile must be different from all existing profiles. Also, the name cannot be

Default . When the New Data Profile dialog box is opened, a proposal for a unique name is filled in the corresponding entry field. If a manually configured profile has a secret password and unauthorized access to the device is a concern even after the SIM PIN has been entered, the password should not be entered in the

New Data Profile dialog box and the Prompt user for password checkbox should be checked instead. In this case, you will be prompted for the password each time a connection is initiated (the Connect Data button in the main Wireless WAN dialog box is selected). If Force PAP authentication (Password Authentication Protocol) is enabled, a simple authentication protocol is used to authenticate a user to a remote access server or

Internet Service Provider.

Reset

The Reset button in the New Profile and Edit Profile dialog boxes resets all entry fields to the values they had when the dialog box was opened.

Advanced IP

Figure F.3

Assigning IP Information

The Advanced IP button in the Show Profile and Edit Profile dialog boxes opens another dialog box that allows you to configure a static IP address as well providing DNS and WINS fields so that you can specify

DNS and WINS resolvers.

F-8 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Appendix F: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN) Settings

Tools Menu

F.1.4.2

Security Configuration

F.1.4.3

The Security Configuration dialog box is accessed through the Tools menu. The Security Configuration dialog box allows you to enable, disable and change the PIN. You will need the current PIN to make any of these changes. The PIN must be enabled in order to be changed. (If the PIN is disabled, the New PIN entry field is greyed out.)

Note: Keep in mind that some network operators do not allow the SIM PIN to be disabled. A new

PIN must consist of 4 to 8 numeric digits.

The Require PIN on resume checkbox is independent of the aforementioned settings. By default, this checkbox is unchecked. While this option remains unchecked, any PIN entered on startup or through the Security

Configuration dialog box and submitted successfully to the modem is stored in memory for as long as the device is not rebooted. This stored PIN is then used without further user interaction whenever the modem requires a PIN (such as resume after suspend or modem removal). The stored PIN is also automatically entered in the Current PIN text box whenever the Security Configuration dialog box is called up.

If unauthorized access to the device is a concern, the Require PIN on resume checkbox should be checked.

In this case, the PIN is not stored; whenever a PIN is required, you will be prompted to enter an appropriate value.

Network Configuration

In the main Wireless WAN window:

• Tap on the Tools menu, and choose Network .

By default the GSM radio modem automatically chooses from the available and allowed networks (allowed networks are the home network and all other networks with which the home network has a roaming agreement). You may find there are some situations in which you want to override this default behaviour. For example, you may want to disable roaming if you find yourself in a border area where the home network is not available but a foreign roaming partner is available. Abroad, you may find that an available network does not have GPRS roaming agreements. In this case, you’ll need to manually select the network which you know to support GPRS roaming.

Automatic network selection is enabled or disabled by checking or unchecking Enable automatic network select in the Network dialog box. When automatic network selection is disabled, you must select a network manually.

Available networks can also be viewed without changing any settings. Scanning for available networks is a lengthy operation—a progress bar is shown while the scan is active. For every network that is found, the network name, country, status and numeric network identifier (MCC/MNC, Mobile Country Code followed by the Mobile Network Code) is displayed.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual F-9

Appendix F: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN) Settings

Tools Menu

Note: Your home network operator will need to let you know which other networks have roaming agreements. Even when a network is listed with an ‘Available’ status, it does not necessarily follow that it can be used or that the roaming agreement covers GPRS.

A status of ‘Forbidden’ indicates that the network cannot be used. If you choose a network that is not covered by a roaming agreement, the status in the main WWAN dialog box changes to ‘Emergency calls only’, ‘No network found’, ‘GPRS not available’ or ‘GPRS not allowed’.

F.1.4.4

Driver Mode Configuration

By default, the Wireless WAN driver is enabled (the Enable driver checkbox is checked). The driver must be disabled in order to use the modem for anything other than GPRS (e.g. dial-up data, fax, or in order to manually submit AT commands to the modem for development, testing, approvals, etc.). If the Enable driver checkbox is not checked, the driver is shut down as soon as the OK button in the Driver Mode dialog box is chosen.

If, on the other hand, the Wireless WAN driver is not running and the Enable driver checkbox is checked, the

Wireless WAN driver is started as soon the Driver Mode dialog box is closed using the OK button.

Note: When the driver is not running, no network status or signal strength can be displayed.

Since all currently supported GSM modems are automatically detected, the Enable automatic port detection checkbox should always be checked. If this checkbox is not checked, a serial port can be selected manually. This experimental feature allows the driver to be used with an internal GSM modem that was not recognized by the automatic detection or an external GSM modem connected to a serial port of the computer through USB or through Bluetooth . An external modem connected to a serial port must support 115.2 kbit/s, 8bit, no parity and hardware flow control.

F-10 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

F.1.4.5

Modem Information

Appendix F: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN) Settings

Tools Menu

F.1.4.6

The fields in this dialog box cannot be edited, they only display information about the computer’s modem. If the network operator has not programmed a user’s phone number into his SIM, the Phone: field remains empty. If the main menu shows an error status, at least partial modem information may be available.

User Interface

Taskbar

Choosing Taskbar displays a dialog box in which you can determine which Wireless WAN icons will be displayed in the taskbar.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual F-11

Appendix F: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN) Settings

SMS Menu

Sounds

Tapping on the Sounds option displays a dialog box in which you can customize which sounds your Omnii will emit and when these sounds will be played.

F.1.5

SMS Menu

SMS (Short Message Service) functions are accessed through the SMS menu. For modems that support a

SIM card, the SIM initialization typically takes longer than the network initialization, resulting in a noticeable delay before the SMS functions become available.

F.1.5.1

New

Tapping on the New button opens a dialog for sending a new SMS message. The recipient's phone number

(to be entered in the To: field) can consist of the digits 0 through 9, as well as the * and # characters, optionally preceded by one + character, indicating an international number (i.e. the country code follows immediately after the + character).

By checking the Store message in Outbox field a new message can be stored in the Outbox before being sent. If no storage space is available, or the modem does not support the storage of outgoing messages, then this checkbox is disabled.

F.1.5.2

Inbox

Tapping on the Inbox button opens the list of received messages. Reading 50 messages, for example, from the SIM can take about 30 seconds. By default the list of messages is sorted with the most recently received message first. The list can be sorted by any other column by clicking on the corresponding column heading. Clicking the same column heading twice reverses the sort order. Tapping on any letter or digit moves the highlight to the next message whose address begins with that letter or number.

F-12 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Appendix F: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN) Settings

Voice

F.1.5.3

F.1.5.4

F.1.6

F.2

Note: The date and time formats can be changed through the Region and Language menu in Control Panel. For a new date or time format to take effect the Inbox has to be closed and reopened.

The Open button opens the selected message in a new window such that the entire message can be read including the original formatting (line breaks are replaced by spaces in the Inbox message list). Pressing the

Reply button opens the new message dialog as described above, except the destination phone number is filled in already.

Outbox

Tapping on the Outbox button opens the list of sent messages. Otherwise the Outbox behaves exactly as the Inbox described above. The date and time when a message was sent is not available for GSM modems.

SMS Configuration

Tapping on the SMS Configuration button opens the SMS configuration dialog. The SMS Centre address follows the same rules as the recipient's phone number in the New message dialog. The message validity period parameter is sent to the SMS Centre with each message sent subsequently and instructs the SMS

Centre on how long it should attempt to deliver the message to the recipient (the SMS Centre may impose an upper limit on the validity period regardless of the setting).

Note: Only certain discrete validity period values can be sent and thus the validity period is rounded to the nearest allowed value. The next time the SMS configuration dialog is opened the rounded value is shown.

The user interface tries to keep the SMS storage location available for a new incoming message if the

Delete oldest message when full checkbox is checked. In this case, when a new message arrives and the

SMS storage becomes full, the oldest received message is deleted. If any string is entered as the ‘Message

Suppression Prefix’, then messages beginning with that string will not be shown in either the Inbox or

Outbox. In this way messages intended for another application running on the same device can be hidden from the user, as long as those messages begin with the string configured here.

Voice

The Voice tab is described in detail under “Voice – Using the WWAN Phone Dialer” on page 115.

Power Mode

The power mode of the modem is controlled through the Power menu in the Control Panel (not through the

Wireless WAN user interface). See “WWAN Power Mode” on page 88.

For PC Card and CF Card modems , the settings are found under the Card Slots tab. If the checkbox for a modem is unchecked, no power is applied to the modem and no driver is loaded (neither the serial port driver nor the Wireless WAN driver). If the checkbox is checked, power is applied to the modem and the drivers are loaded when the computer is turned on. Power is removed from the modem when the computer enters suspend mode.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual F-13

APPENDIX: WIRELESS

ZERO CONFIG SETTINGS

GWireless Zero Config Settings

G.1

Wireless Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-3

G.1.1

Wireless Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-3

G.1.2

Wireless Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-4

G.2 Assigning An IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-6

G.2.1

Name Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-6

G.3 Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-7

G.3.1

Rearranging Preferred Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-7

G.3.2 Deleting A Preferred Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-7

G.3.3 Changing Network Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-7

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual G-1

G.1

Appendix G: Wireless Zero Config Settings

Wireless Information

Wireless Zero Config , the Windows native supplicant, can be used to configure the radio. To ensure that

Wireless Zero Config is activated, refer to “Wi-Fi Config: Advanced” on page 128.

• Tap on Start>Settings>Network and Dial-up Connections.

• Choose the radio icon representing the radio you want to set up—in the sample screen in Figure G.4, this is labelled as SDIO86861

Figure G.4 802.11 Wireless LAN Settings Window

G.1.1

Wireless Statistics

When you choose the Wireless LAN icon, an 802.11 Wireless LAN Settings window is displayed. This tab lists your radio statistics. Choosing the Zero button resets the statistics of the last four items—Packets IN,

Packets OUT, IN errors and OUT errors.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual G-3

Appendix G: Wireless Zero Config Settings

Wireless Information

Figure G.5 Wireless Statistics

G.1.2

Wireless Information

This tab displays existing networks to which you can connect, and it allows you to add a new network or modify the settings for an existing network.

• Configure button: To change the settings in an existing network, highlight the network you want to modify, and tap on the Configure button to display the Wireless Properties dialog box.

• Connect button: To force connection to a specific, existing network, highlight the network to which you want Omnii to connect, and tap on the Connect button.

Figure G.6 Wireless Information

This tab lists available networks—any access points that are broadcasting an SSID, and it lists preferred networks—networks that you have configured. Since access points are generally secure, they will most likely not be listed here. By default, Omnii attempts to connect to preferred networks. This behaviour can be changed by enabling Automatically connect to non-preferred networks in the Advanced dialog box (see

Figure G.9).

• To add a new configuration, tap on the Add New button. A blank Wireless Properties dialog box is displayed.

G-4 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Appendix G: Wireless Zero Config Settings

Wireless Information

Wireless Properties

Figure G.7 Wireless Properties

• Type the appropriate SSID (Service Set Identifier) in the Network name (SSID): dialog box. The

Network name field can contain a maximum of 32 characters. The name assigned here is listed as a preferred network.

Important: Keep in mind that Omnii will only communicate with access points that are configured with the same SSID.

• Ad Hoc And Infrastructure: If you are using an Infrastructure network—one in which the hand-helds must pass data through an access point—leave the checkbox next to This is an ad hoc network blank.

If you are using an Ad Hoc network—a network in which the hand-helds pass data directly to other Ad

Hoc devices without an access point—add a checkmark in the checkbox next to This is an ad hoc network to enable Ad Hoc.

• Encryption: WEP (Wired-Equivalent Privacy) encryption prevents others from accidentally accessing your network. If you are not using encryption, you can choose Disabled from the drop-down encryption menu. Otherwise, leave this field as is.

AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) is a standard for protecting data through encryption. AES supports key sizes of 128 bits, 192 bits and 256 bits and will serve as a replacement for the Data Encryption

Standard (DES), which has a key size of 56 bits. In addition to the increased security that comes with larger key sizes, the AES algorithm is a symmetrical block cipher that can encrypt (encipher) and decrypt (decipher) information.

• Authentication: 802.11 supports several subtypes of network authentication services: Open, Shared,

WPA, and WPA-PSK . Under Open authentication, any wireless station can request authentication. The station that needs to authenticate with another wireless station sends an authentication management frame that contains the identity of the sending station. The receiving station then sends back a frame that indicates whether it recognizes the identity of the sending station.

Under Shared authentication, each wireless station is assumed to have received a secret shared key over a secure channel that is independent from the 802.11 wireless network communications channel.

Under WPA and WPA-PSK authentication, the use of 802.1x authentication is required. For wireless networks without a Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) infrastructure, WPA supports the use of a preshared key. For wireless networks with a RADIUS infrastructure, Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) and RADIUS is supported.

• Network Key: This text box is used to specify a 5 or 13 ASCII character sequence or an equivalent 10 or

26 Hexadecimal digit sequence that matches the active WEP key on the access point.

To assign a Network key , highlight The key is provided automatically , and uncheck the checkbox to disable this option.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual G-5

Appendix G: Wireless Zero Config Settings

Assigning An IP Address

Figure G.8 Network Key and Key Index

G.2

G.2.1

• Key Index: This field is used to identify the WEP key.

Enter a value from 1 to 4 .

• Enable 802.1x authentication: 802.1X

is the IEEE standard that offers additional security for local area networks. It provides authentication for user devices attached to an Ethernet network, whether wired or wireless. A security protocol packet such as TLS or MD5 encapsulated in an EAP is used in conjunction with the 802.1X standard to authenticate users at the MAC layer. Available EAPs are listed in the drop-down menu next to the EAP option.

To activate 802.1X, highlight 802.1x authentication , and check the checkbox.

• EAP Type (Extensible Authentication Protocol): This drop-down menu lists the EAP types available on your system. The items in this drop-down menu will vary depending on your network setup. Keep in mind also that some authentication protocols require that you select a Certificate. By selecting the

Properties button, you will be able to select a Certificate . “Certificates” on page 65 provides a website that outlines how to create certificates for your network.

• Saving and exiting the radio setup: Once you’ve completed the configuration, press [ENTER ], or tap on OK .

The connection you created will be listed in the Wireless Information tab as a preferred network. The radio will search for the SSID and compare the WEP and authentication information you specified. If there is a match between the hand-held settings and the access point settings, the hand-held will communicate on the network through the access point.

Assigning An IP Address

If your network is not using a DHCP server, you will need to assign an IP address. Refer to “IP Address” on page 126 for details about assigning an IP address.

Name Server

Refer to “Name Server” on page 127 for details about this option.

G-6 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

G.3

Appendix G: Wireless Zero Config Settings

Advanced Features

To display the Advanced Wireless Settings dialog box:

• Tap on the Advanced button in the Wireless Information tab. (Refer to Figure G.6.)

This window lists the available preferred networks.

Figure G.9 Advanced Wireless Settings

G.3.1

G.3.2

G.3.3

Rearranging Preferred Networks

Omnii attempts to connect with the networks listed in this dialog box in sequence, beginning at the top of the list. If you need to rearrange this list of networks—move networks up and down in the list:

• Tap in the Networks List , and highlight the network that you want to move up or down in the list.

• To move the highlighted item in the list upward or downward, tap on the Up or Down button.

Deleting A Preferred Network

To delete a network from this list:

• In the preferred networks list, highlight the network you want to remove.

• Tap on the Delete button.

Changing Network Properties

To change the properties of an existing preferred network:

• Highlight the network that you want to modify.

• Tap on the Properties button.

• Make any necessary changes in the Wireless Properties dialog box, and press [ENTER] to save the changes.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual G-7

Numbers

1D internal scanner 33, 34

2D imager 34

36-key keyboard alpha keys, accessing 26 uppercase letters, creating 27

7545 Model See Omnii E-3

802.11a/b/g/n radio E-7 configuring 121–128

A accessories carrying case 137 desktop docking stations 142

Ethernet cable 147 hand strap 134, 135 holster, hard shell 137 pistol grip 133 quad docking station 146 vehicle cradle 149

AC Wall adaptor 139

Administrator Password (PsionVU settings) 91

AGPS (Assisted Global Positioning System) 72

Aim Duration C-5 aiming dot, duration of C-5, C-10

All

Predefined preset B-4

ALT Key 23 appearance (display colour scheme) 67 appending to barcodes characters 98

App Launch Keys 55 approvals, Omnii (including scanner) E-4 arrow keys moving the cursor 23 audio indicators adjusting volume 31 description of beep conditions 31

AutoRestore 111

B background, choosing for Desktop 93 background image (display scheme) 67 backlight display 68 intensity 27

Backspace (DEL Key) 23 backup Profile (Total Recall)

AutoRestore 111

Clone to USB 112 creating 109

Restore 111 restoring 111

Upload to A.R.C.

112 viewing 111 backups, managing profiles 111

Bad Scan Vibrates 99 barcode appending to 98

INDEX

INDEXINDEX decodes required C-10 decoding edge-to-edge C-10

Decoding symbology predefined presets B-3 displaying type of barcode 98 parameters 96, C-3

Security C-10

Translation tab 99 barcode reader integrated scanner, operation of 32 bar code symbologies color camera C17, C18 imager C17 battery 21

Advanced dialog box 88

Battery Health dialog box 88

Built-in Devices dialog box 88 capacity dialog box 86 charger safety instructions 141 charging 14, 21, 141 charging with desktop docking station 144 contact pinout A-6 estimated battery backup time 87 installing 14 power saving suspend dialog box 86 replacing 14 specifications E-5

ST3006 6-slot battery charger 156–158

Suspend Threshold dialog box 87 swap time 21 taskbar icon 30

Baud, port replicator 102 beeper adjusting volume 31 description of beep conditions 31

Bi-Direction Redundancy C-6

Bluetooth radio devices, pairing 59

GPRS setup 62

ISM band 56 radio configuration 56–65 setup 56 specifications E-8

Boot to BooSt 16

Bright For (backlight) 68

C cable diagrams A-1 calibrating touchscreen 27, 107

Call Lists 117

Call Management 117 camera specifications E-4 camera settings 73 case, carrying 137 chargers 141 desktop docking station 142 indicators 144 installing at a site 141 operation 144 operator controls 141 safety instructions 141

Snap Modules 138

ST4004 operator controls 147

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual I

Index

ST4004 quad docking station 146 troubleshooting 148 clean start 16

Click Data (scanner double-click) 98

Click Time (scanner double-click) 98 clone (Total Recall) 110

Clone to USB 112

Codepage 99

Command Prompt 38 communication

Ethernet connection (quad docking station) 147 computer hardware properties 108 conference calls, creating 117

Continuous Scan Mode C-8

Control Panel accessing 51

App Launch Keys icon 55 applications list 52

Display Properties 67 keyboard properties 75 power management properties 86

Predefined presets B-3 stylus properties 107

Control Panel Settings (PsionVU settings) 94 cradle See also vehicle cradle 149

CTRL Key 23

Custom preset B-3 cycle tasks 40

Data Bits, port replicator 102 decoded (internal) scanner parameters C-4 decoded Intermec (ISCP) parameters C-7 decoded scanners C-9 decoding barcodes decodes required C-10

Security C-10

DEL (Backspace) Key 23

Delete Char Set ECIs C-7

Demo

Scanner 38

Signature 38

Sound 38

Desktop background, choosing 93 desktop connection, remote 95 desktop docking station See docking station, desktop 142 desktop shell appearance 42 desktop themes 93 dialer (phone), using 17, 115 dialing, phone number 17, 115, 116

Diff Read Timeout C-8

Dim For (backlight) 68 dismounting partitions 105 display appearance (colour scheme) 67 background (image) 67 backlight 68 backlight, adjusting 27

Display Properties 67 display font size 115

Display Properties 67 docking device icons 31 docking station 141–142 desktop 142–145 cleaning 145 indicators 144 operation 144 operator controls 141 troubleshooting 145 installation at site 141

ST4004, quad operator controls 146, 147 uploading data using 66 docking stations quad docking station (ST4004) 146

Dot Time C-5, C-10 double-click appending characters to a decoded•arcode 98 scanner trigger 98

Double-Click, Manage Triggers menu 83

Double-Tap (stylus settings) 107

Dr. Debug 69

EA11 2D Imager specifications D-8

EA20X scanner specifications D-9

ECI Decoder C-7

Error Reporting 70

ESC Key 24

Ethernet, connecting with docking station 147

EV15 1D imager scanner specifications D-7

F font size, display (Registry Editor) 115 formatting entire memory card 103 partitions 105

FTP Server, Registry Editor 113

Function Keys

36-key keyboard 26

59-key keyboard 25

G gang charger 156–158

Glossy surface, Predefined preset B-4

Good Scan Beep 98

Good Scan Vibrates 99

GPRS ( Bluetooth ) 62

GPS Settings (built-in profiles) 70

Group, preset B-3

GSM/EDGE F-3

GSM/GPRS F-3–F-13

H hand strap 134 hand strap, installing 135

Hard Reset 16 hard reset 16 headsets, pairing ( Bluetooth ) 59

HHP 5080 imager specifications D-10 holster, hard shell 137

I 2 of 5 Short Code C-10

Identifier, Default preset group (imaging software) B-3 imager

EV15 specifications D-7

HHP 5080 specifications D-10 two dimensional (2D) imager 34

Imager & Camera settings 73

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Imagers applet B-1

Import/Export to File (PsionVU settings) 94 indicators

802.11 radio signal quality 30 battery 30 docking devices 31

LED functions 28 modifier keys 30 onscreen 30 scanner message 33, 34 task bar 36

Ingenuity (PsionVU Shell), settings 93 input panel (Control Panel) 53 installation hand strap 135 pistol grip 133

Snap Modules 138 vehicle cradle 149 integrated scanner option 32

Intensity (7035 backlighting) 68, 76

Internet Explorer 38

IPv6 114

ISM band, Bluetooth radio 56

K keyboard

36-key keyboard 26 alpha keys, 36-key keyboard 26 backlight 76 key repeat 75, 76

One Shot Mode 76 onscreen, Microsoft SIP 74

Properties 75 keyboard keys 22

ALT 23 arrow keys 23

Backspace 23

CTRL 23

DEL 23

ESC 24 function keys, accessing 25 macro keys 26, 77 modifiers 24 navigating using the keyboard 35

SCAN 24

SHIFT 23

SPACE 24

Tab 24

Key Repeat tab 75

Laser On Time C-5, C-7

LED charge 29 functions 28 scan 29 troubleshooting quad dock ST4004 148

Linear

Predefined preset B-4

Linear and PDF

Predefined preset B-4

Linear Security Level C-6

Lithium-ion batteries installing 14 removing 14

Lock Sequence 81

Low light

Predefined preset B-4

Low light near

Predefined preset B-5

Low power

Predefined preset B-4

Low Power Timeout C-5, C-8

Macro keys

36-key keyboard 26

59-key keyboard 26 accessing 26 executing a macro 78

Macros menu, accessing 77 recording and saving 77 maintenance 44

Manage Triggers 82

Matrix

Predefined preset B-4

MC75i GSM/GPRS/EDGE radio E-6 memory card creating partitions 104 formatting entire 103 formatting partition 105 messages

Scan Indicator 98 scanner warning message 98

Scan Result 98 microphone adjustments 120 microphone gain adjustment 84 microSD Card, inserting 31

Microsoft® ActiveSync® 66

Microsoft Soft Input Panel (SIP) 74

Minimum Cancel Time C-5, C-8

Mobile Device Center (Windows), setting up 67 modem using VPN clients F-7 modifier keys 24 locking 25

One Shot Mode 76 unlocking 25

Motion, Predefined preset B-5 mounting partitions 106

Multiple Beep Tones 98

N network connection, monitoring 129

Omnii approvals E-4 model numbers 4 specifications E-3

Omnii RT15 specifications E-3

Omnii XT15 specifications E-3

On & Off button 15 one dimensional internal scanner 33, 34

One Shot Mode 76

ON For 76 onscreen keyboard, Soft Input Panel (SIP) 53, 74

Open TekTerm application 85 operating system properties 108

Index

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual III

Index

P pairing Bluetooth devices 59

Parameter Scanning C-5, C-8

Parity, port replicator 102 partitions creating 104 deleting 105 dismounting 105 formatting 105 management 105 mounting 106

PDF and linear

Predefined preset B-4 phone

Services, setting up 118

Voicemail, setting up 119 phone, dialing 17, 115

Phonebook 117 phone number, dialing 17, 115, 116 picker cradle, installing cable 153 pinouts A-1 pistol grip, installing 133 pocket PC compatibility 86 port pinouts A-1

Port Replicator settings (COM5 and COM6)

Baud 102

Data Bits 102

Parity 102

Port B (COM6), Power 101

Stop Bits 102

Trigger On Sequence 102 ports parameters 101

Postal

Predefined preset B-4

Power

Button 23

Properties 86

Source 86 to Port B (COM6) 101

Power Management Properties

Advanced 88 battery capacity 86

Battery Health 88

Built-in Devices 88 suspend, power saving 86

Suspend Threshold 87

Power Mode Decoded (Internal) Scanner C-5

Predefined preset B-3

All B-4

Glossy surface B-4 imaging software B-4

Linear B-4

Linear and PDF B-4

Low light B-4

Low light near B-5

Low power B-4

Matrix B-4

Motion B-5

Postal B-4

Prefix C-6

Preset (imaging software)

Custom B-3

Group B-3

Predefined B-3

Preset Group, Default identifier (imaging software) B-3

Profile restoring backup 111 viewing backup 111

Programs

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Command Prompt 38

Internet Explorer 38

Remote Desktop Connection 38

Windows Explorer 38 protective case 137

PsionVU menus 90

PsionVU settings

Administrator Password 91

Control Panel Settings 94

Import/Export to File 94

Restrictions 93

Shell Settings 92

PsionVU Shell 42 punctuation marks, accessing (SHIFT Key) 23

R radio

802.11 signal quality 30

Bluetooth 56–65 specifications

802.11a/b/g/n E-7

Bluetooth E-8

MC75i GSM/GPRS/EDGE E-6 recalibrating touchscreen 27, 107

Registry Editor 113

Advanced Interface and Network 114

Remote Desktop Connection 38, 95

Repeat

Delay (between key repeats) 75 menu (key repeat settings) 75

Rate (of key repeats) 76 resetting Omnii

Boot to BooSt 16 clean start 16

Hard Reset 16 hard reset 16 warm reset 16

Restore Now 111

Restrictions (PsionVU settings) 93 return-to-factory warranty 1iii

Run (Start Menu) 41

S safety instructions battery charger 141 scanner 32 safety warning, scanner 32

Same Read Timeout C-8

Same Read Validate C-8

Scan Data Format C-6

Scan Indicator 98

SCAN Key 24

Scan Log File 99

Scan Mode C-5 scanner

Aim Duration C-5 aiming (target) dot duration C-5, C-10 aiming dot duration C-5 appending data 98

Bad Scan Vibrates 99 barcode, appending data to 98

Bi-Direction Redundancy C-6

Click Data (appending data) 98

Click Time (double-click) 98

Codepage 99

Continuous Scan Mode C-8 decoded C-9

decoded (internal) C-4 decoded Intermec (ISCP) C-7

Delete Char Set ECIs C-7

Dot Time C-5 double-click 98

EA11 2D Imager specifications D-8

ECI Decoder C-7

Good Scan Beep 98

Good Scan Vibrates 99

Laser On Time C-5, C-7

Linear Security Level C-6

Low Power Timeout C-5, C-8

Minimum Cancel Time C-5, C-8

Multiple Beep Tones 98 one dimensional (1D) internal scanner 33, 34

Parameter Scanning C-5, C-8 ports parameters 101

Prefix C-6 safety warnings 32

Scan Data Format C-6 scan failure, codepage 99

Scan Indicator 98

Scan Log File 99

Scan Mode C-5

Scan Result Time 98

SE 1223LR specifications D-4

SE 1224HP specifications D-5

SE 1524 ER specifications D-6

SE955 specifications D-3

Security C-10

Short Code C-10

Soft Scan Timeout 99 specifications, internal D-3

Suffix C-6 target dot duration C-5, C-10 techniques (scanning) 33

Transmit Code 1D Char C-6 troubleshooting tips 33

Verify C-10 warning message 98 scanning

1D internal 33, 34 appending characters 98 safety instructions 32 symbologies 96, C-3

Translations tab 99

Scan Result 98

Scan Result Time 98 screen stylus, using to navigate 35 touch pen, using 35

Windows Embedded CE, navigating 35

SE 1223LR specifications D-4

SE 1224HP specifications D-5

SE 1524 ER specifications D-6

SE955 specifications D-3

Security C-10

See Symbol 24

Services 118

Set for AutoRestore 111

Settings

Control Panel 40

Network and Dial-up connections 40

Run 40

Taskbar and Start Menu 40

Shell Settings (PsionVU settings) 92

SHIFT Key 23

Short Code C-10

Shutdown

Suspend 41

Shutdown (Start Menu) 41

Index signal quality, 802.11

SIM card, inserting 31

SIP (Soft Input Panel) 74

Snap Modules pinouts A-4

ST4000 (power only) 138

ST4001 (USB Host/Client) 138, A4

ST4005 (USB DE9M) 138, A4

SNTP, Registry Editor 114

Soft Input Panel

Control Panel 53

Microsoft SIP 74

Soft Scan Timeout 99 sound settings 120

SPACE Key 24 specifications camera E-4

EA20X scanner D-9

EV15 1D imager D-7

HHP 5080 imager D-10

Omnii Hand-Held Computer E-3 scanner, internal D-3

ST4000 Snap Module 138

ST4001 Snap Module 138, A4

ST4004 quad docking station 146 cleaning 148

Ethernet 147 troubleshooting 148

ST4005 Snap Module 138, A4

Start Menu 37 cycle tasks 40 programs 38

Run 41

Settings 40

Shutdown 41 system tray 39 task manager 40

Stop Bits, port replicator 102 stylus (touch pen), using 35

Stylus Properties 107

Double-tap (stylus sensitivity) 107

Suffix C-6

Surface

Glossy B-4

Suspend (Shutdown menu) 41

Suspend Timeout 87 swap time (for battery) 21

24 symbologies, barcode 96, C-3 displaying type of barcode 98

Symbol Soft Input Panel (figure) 25

System Properties 108 system tray 39

Tab Key 24 target dot, duration of C-5, C-10 taskbar onscreen indicators

802.11 radio signal quality 30

AC power 30 battery 30 docking devices 31 modifier keys 30 using 36 task manager 40

TCP/IP, configuring 126–127 themes, desktop 93

Total Recall

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual V

Index

AutoRestore Profile 111 backup, creating 109 backup Profile, restoring 111 clone, creating 110

Clone to USB 112 managing profiles 111

Restore Profile 111

Upload to A.R.C.

112 view Profile 111 touch pen, using 35 touchscreen recalibration 27, 107 stylus, using 35 touch pen, using 35

Translations parameters (barcodes) 99

Transmit Code 1D Char C-6 trigger, double-click 98 trigger mappings 82

Trigger On Sequence, port replicator 102

Trigger-Press Type, Manage Triggers menu 84 triggers, configuring 82 troubleshooting

ST40004 148 troubleshooting tips (scanning) 33

Upload to A.R.C.

112

Use Virtual Serial Port F-7

V vehicle cradle 149 powered pinouts A-5

Verify C-10

Voice

Call Lists 117

Call Management 117 conference calls 117 dialing a number 116

Phonebook 117 phone dialer 17, 115 phone options 17, 115

Services 118 voicemail, setting up 119

Volume & Sounds Properties 120

W warm reset 16 warnings 98 warranty 1iii

Wi-Fi Config 121–125

Windows® Start Menu See Start Menu 37

Windows 7 66

Windows Embedded CE, navigating in 34

Windows Explorer 38

Windows Mobile Device Center, setting up 67

Windows Vista® 66

Wireless WAN F-3–F-13

Use Virtual Serial Port F-7

Voice F-13

Wireless Zero Config G-1–G-7

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

OMNII™

HAND-HELD COMPUTER

User Manual

(Windows

Embedded CE 6.0)

November 17, 2011

Part No. 8000211.A

ISO 9001 Certified

Quality Management System

TABLE OF

CONTENTS

Chapter 1: Introduction

Chapter 2: Basic Operation

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii

Chapter 4: Configuration

Chapter 5: Accessories

Appendices

Appendix A: Port Pinouts

Appendix B: Omnii Specifications

Appendix C: Imager & Camera Settings

Appendix D: Scanner Settings

Appendix E: Internal Imager & Scanner Specifications

Appendix F: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN) Settings

Appendix G: Wireless Zero Config Settings

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I

INTRODUCTION

1.1

About This Manual

1.2

Text Conventions

1.3

Overview of Omnii Hand-Held Computer

1.4

Regulatory Labels

BASIC OPERATION

2.1

Omnii Features

2.2

2.3

Omnii Modules Available

Documents Available

2.4

Preparing Omnii for Operation

2.5

Switching Omnii On and Off

2.6

Resetting Omnii

2.7

2.8

Attaching Carrying Accessories

Calibrating the Touchscreen

2.9

2.10

2.11

2.12

Imager and Scanner Options

Connectivity

Data Transfer

Voice Communication

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR

OMNII

3.1

3.2

Operating System

Battery Details

3.3

The Keyboard

3.4

The Display

3.5

Indicators

3.6

Inserting the microSD Card and SIM Card

3.7

Scanners and Imagers

3.8

Windows Embedded CE 6.0

3.9

The PsionVU Desktop Shell

3.10